<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8" ?>

<rss version="2.0"
  xmlns:ent="http://www.purl.org/NET/ENT/1.0/"
  xmlns:dc="http://purl.org/dc/elements/1.1/">
<channel>
  <title>Jonathan&#39;s CCNP Blog</title>
  <link>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog</link>
  <description>This is my online location for my CCNP notes/docs</description>
  <language>en-us</language>
  <lastBuildDate>Mon, 01 Mar 2010 05:12:36 +0000</lastBuildDate>
  <category domain="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog">Main Page</category>
  <generator>Blogware</generator>
  
  <item>
    <dc:creator>sparky</dc:creator>
    <title>My CCNP track commences...</title>
    <link>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/9/14/4321362.html</link>
    <guid>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/9/14/4321362.html</guid>
    <pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 14:15:00 +0100</pubDate>
    <description>So, the time has come to look at the CCNP&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;For the next 15 weeks I&#39;ll be looking at the &lt;a href=&quot;https://cisco.hosted.jivesoftware.com/community/certifications/ccnp&quot;&gt;Implementing Secure Converged Wide Area Networks&lt;/a&gt; (642-825&amp;nbsp; ISCW) course.&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;Again, I&#39;m attending the &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/web/learning/netacad/index.html&quot;&gt;Cisco Networking Academy&lt;/a&gt; in Leeds and I&#39;ll be doing each of the 4 courses associated with each of the exams. If you&#39;ve had trouble getting in to the CCNP then I must recommend that you check out the Cisco Networking Academy its well worth the effort!&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;During the coming weeks I&#39;ll be posting relevant artcles that I find useful as an online record. Make of it what you will, this is for me.&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;If you&#39;re studying for any certification then my best advice would be to book your exam as a priority. That way you have defined target to aim for and you can plan accordingly. &lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;All the best and stay focused.&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;</description>
    
    <category domain="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog">Main Page</category>
    
    <category domain="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/CCNP">CCNP</category>
    
    
    
    
  </item>
  
  <item>
    <dc:creator>sparky</dc:creator>
    <title>Erase the Config on a PIX firewall</title>
    <link>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/9/3/4309176.html</link>
    <guid>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/9/3/4309176.html</guid>
    <pubDate>Thu, 03 Sep 2009 09:45:00 +0100</pubDate>
    <description>&lt;font size=&quot;3&quot;&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;font-weight: bold; text-decoration: underline;&quot;&gt;Erase the Config on a PIX firewall&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;pix# write erase&lt;br&gt;
Erase PIX configuration in flash memory? [confirm]&lt;br&gt;
pix# reload&lt;br&gt;
Proceed with reload? [confirm]&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;Nuff said&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;br&gt;</description>
    
    <category domain="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog">Main Page</category>
    
    <category domain="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/GeneralNetworking">General Networking</category>
    
    
    <ent:cloud ent:href="">
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="PIX" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=PIX">PIX</ent:topic>
    
    </ent:cloud>
    
    
    
  </item>
  
  <item>
    <dc:creator>sparky</dc:creator>
    <title>I passed!!</title>
    <link>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/8/25/4299448.html</link>
    <guid>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/8/25/4299448.html</guid>
    <pubDate>Tue, 25 Aug 2009 11:22:00 +0100</pubDate>
    <description>Well, after a year studying the CCNA at the Cisco Networking Academy at Leeds City College I sat the CCNA exam last Monday morning and passed with flying colours!!&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;On to the CCNP in September starting with the ISCW course.&lt;br&gt;</description>
    
    <category domain="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog">Main Page</category>
    
    
    
    
  </item>
  
  <item>
    <dc:creator>sparky</dc:creator>
    <title>Configure NAT</title>
    <link>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/8/7/4280719.html</link>
    <guid>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/8/7/4280719.html</guid>
    <pubDate>Fri, 07 Aug 2009 08:31:00 +0100</pubDate>
    <description>Configuring NAT is covered in this article : &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/tech/tk648/tk361/technologies_tech_note09186a0080094e77.shtml&quot;&gt;Configuring Network Address Translation&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br&gt;</description>
    
    <category domain="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/CCNADocs">CCNA Docs</category>
    
    
    <ent:cloud ent:href="">
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="NAT" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=NAT">NAT</ent:topic>
    
    </ent:cloud>
    
    
    
  </item>
  
  <item>
    <dc:creator>sparky</dc:creator>
    <title>How Network Address Translation works</title>
    <link>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/8/7/4280718.html</link>
    <guid>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/8/7/4280718.html</guid>
    <pubDate>Fri, 07 Aug 2009 08:28:00 +0100</pubDate>
    <description>&lt;p style=&quot;text-decoration: underline; font-weight: bold;&quot; class=&quot;printableTocItem&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;4&quot;&gt;Introduction to How Network Address Translation Works&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
      &lt;div style=&quot;float: right; width: 400px; text-align: center; padding-bottom: 3px;&quot;&gt;&lt;img src=&quot;http://static.howstuffworks.com/gif/nat-router.jpg&quot; alt=&quot;nat router diagram&quot; width=&quot;400&quot; height=&quot;146&quot;&gt;&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;&lt;span class=&quot;caption&quot;&gt;Network Address Translation helps improve security by reusing IP addresses. &lt;/span&gt;&lt;font face=&quot;arial,helvetica&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;-1&quot;&gt;&lt;strong&gt;The NAT router translates traffic coming into and leaving the private network.&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;p&gt;If
you are reading this article, you are most likely connected to the
Internet and viewing it at the HowStuffWorks Web site. There&#39;s a very
good chance that you are using &lt;strong&gt;Network Address Translation&lt;/strong&gt; (NAT) right now.
&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;
The Internet has grown larger than anyone ever imagined it could be.
Although the exact size is unknown, the current estimate is that there
are about 100 million hosts and more than 350 million users actively on
the Internet. That is more than the entire population of the United
States! In fact, the rate of growth has been such that the Internet is
effectively doubling in size each year.
&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;
So what does the size of the Internet have to do with NAT? Everything! For a computer to communicate with other computers and &lt;a href=&quot;http://computer.howstuffworks.com/nat.htm/web-server.htm&quot;&gt;Web servers&lt;/a&gt; on the Internet, it must have an &lt;strong&gt;IP address&lt;/strong&gt;. An &lt;a href=&quot;http://computer.howstuffworks.com/nat.htm/question549.htm&quot;&gt;IP address&lt;/a&gt;
(IP stands for Internet Protocol) is a unique 32-bit number that
identifies the location of your computer on a network. Basically, it
works like your street address -- as a way to find out exactly where
you are and deliver information to you.
&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;When IP addressing first came out, everyone thought that there
were plenty of addresses to cover any need. Theoretically, you could
have &lt;a href=&quot;http://computer.howstuffworks.com/nat.htm/question549.htm&quot;&gt;4,294,967,296 unique addresses&lt;/a&gt; (2&lt;sup&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;-1&quot;&gt;32&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/sup&gt;).
The actual number of available addresses is smaller (somewhere between
3.2 and 3.3 billion) because of the way that the addresses are
separated into classes, and because some addresses are set aside for
multicasting, testing or other special uses.
&lt;/p&gt;&lt;div id=&quot;googleAd&quot;&gt; &lt;/div&gt;&lt;p&gt;
With the explosion of the Internet and the increase in &lt;a href=&quot;http://computer.howstuffworks.com/nat.htm/home-network.htm&quot;&gt;home networks&lt;/a&gt;
and business networks, the number of available IP addresses is simply
not enough. The obvious solution is to redesign the address format to
allow for more possible addresses. This is being developed (called &lt;strong&gt;IPv6&lt;/strong&gt;), but will take several years to implement because it requires modification of the entire infrastructure of the Internet.
&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;­
This is where NAT (&lt;a href=&quot;http://computer.howstuffworks.com/nat.htm/framed.htm?parent=nat.htm&amp;amp;url=http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc1631.html&quot;&gt;RFC 1631&lt;/a&gt;) comes to the rescue. Network Address Translation allows a single device, such as a &lt;a href=&quot;http://computer.howstuffworks.com/nat.htm/router.htm&quot;&gt;router&lt;/a&gt;,
to act as an agent between the Internet (or &quot;public network&quot;) and a
local (or &quot;private&quot;) network. This means that only a single, unique IP
address is required to represent an entire group of computers.
&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;
But the shortage of IP addresses is only one reason to use NAT. In this edition of &lt;a href=&quot;http://computer.howstuffworks.com/nat.htm/index.htm&quot;&gt;&lt;strong&gt;HowStuffWorks&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/a&gt;, you will learn more about how NAT can benefit you. But first, let&#39;s take a closer look at NAT and exactly what it can do...
&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;

&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;
&lt;!-- Page Break --&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;printableTocItem&quot;&gt;What Does NAT Do?&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;NAT is like the receptionist in a large office. Let&#39;s say you have
left instructions with the receptionist not to forward any calls to you
unless you request it. Later on, you call a potential client and leave
a message for that client to call you back. You tell the receptionist
that you are expecting a call from this client and to put her through.
&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The client calls the main number to your office, which is the
only number the client knows. When the client tells the receptionist
that she is looking for you, the receptionist checks a lookup table
that matches your name with your extension. The receptionist knows that
you requested this call, and therefore forwards the caller to your
extension.
&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;
Developed by Cisco, Network Address Translation is used by a device (&lt;a href=&quot;http://computer.howstuffworks.com/nat.htm/firewall.htm&quot;&gt;firewall&lt;/a&gt;, &lt;a href=&quot;http://computer.howstuffworks.com/nat.htm/router.htm&quot;&gt;router&lt;/a&gt; or &lt;a href=&quot;http://computer.howstuffworks.com/nat.htm/category-computers.htm&quot;&gt;computer&lt;/a&gt;) that sits between an internal network and the rest of the world. NAT has many forms and can work in several ways:
&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;&lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Static NAT&lt;/strong&gt; - Mapping an unregistered IP address to
a registered IP address on a one-to-one basis. Particularly useful when
a device needs to be accessible from outside the network.
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;p&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;&lt;table align=&quot;center&quot; cellpadding=&quot;3&quot; cellspacing=&quot;0&quot; width=&quot;400&quot;&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;&lt;tr&gt;&lt;td&gt;&lt;font face=&quot;arial,helvetica&quot;&gt;
&lt;/font&gt;&lt;center&gt;&lt;font face=&quot;arial,helvetica&quot;&gt;&lt;img src=&quot;http://static.howstuffworks.com/gif/nat-static.jpg&quot;&gt;&lt;br&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;-1&quot;&gt;&lt;strong&gt;In static NAT, the computer with the IP address of 192.168.32.10 will always translate to 213.18.123.110.&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt;&lt;br&gt;&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/center&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;p&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;&lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Dynamic NAT&lt;/strong&gt; - Maps an unregistered IP address to a registered IP address from a group of registered IP addresses.
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;p&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;&lt;table align=&quot;center&quot; cellpadding=&quot;3&quot; cellspacing=&quot;0&quot; width=&quot;400&quot;&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;&lt;tr&gt;&lt;td&gt;&lt;font face=&quot;arial,helvetica&quot;&gt;
&lt;/font&gt;&lt;center&gt;&lt;font face=&quot;arial,helvetica&quot;&gt;&lt;img src=&quot;http://static.howstuffworks.com/gif/nat-dynamic.jpg&quot;&gt;&lt;br&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;-1&quot;&gt;&lt;strong&gt;In dynamic NAT, the computer with the IP
address 192.168.32.10 will translate to the first available address in
the range from 213.18.123.100 to 213.18.123.150.&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt;&lt;br&gt;&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/center&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;p&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;&lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Overloading&lt;/strong&gt; - A form of dynamic NAT that maps
multiple unregistered IP addresses to a single registered IP address by
using different ports. This is known also as PAT (Port Address
Translation), single address NAT or port-level multiplexed NAT.
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;p&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;&lt;table align=&quot;center&quot; cellpadding=&quot;3&quot; cellspacing=&quot;0&quot; width=&quot;400&quot;&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;&lt;tr&gt;&lt;td&gt;&lt;font face=&quot;arial,helvetica&quot;&gt;
&lt;/font&gt;&lt;center&gt;&lt;font face=&quot;arial,helvetica&quot;&gt;&lt;img src=&quot;http://static.howstuffworks.com/gif/nat-overload.jpg&quot;&gt;&lt;br&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;-1&quot;&gt;&lt;strong&gt;In overloading, each computer on the private
network is translated to the same IP address (213.18.123.100), but with
a different port number assignment.&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt;&lt;br&gt;&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/center&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;p&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;&lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Overlapping&lt;/strong&gt; - When the IP addresses used on your
internal network are registered IP addresses in use on another network,
the router must maintain a lookup table of these addresses so that it
can intercept them and replace them with registered unique IP
addresses. It is important to note that the NAT router must translate
the &quot;internal&quot; addresses to registered unique addresses as well as
translate the &quot;external&quot; registered addresses to addresses that are
unique to the private network. This can be done either through static
NAT or by using &lt;a href=&quot;http://computer.howstuffworks.com/nat.htm/dns.htm&quot;&gt;DNS&lt;/a&gt; and implementing dynamic NAT.
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;p&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;&lt;table align=&quot;center&quot; cellpadding=&quot;3&quot; cellspacing=&quot;0&quot; width=&quot;400&quot;&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;&lt;tr&gt;&lt;td&gt;&lt;font face=&quot;arial,helvetica&quot;&gt;
&lt;/font&gt;&lt;center&gt;&lt;font face=&quot;arial,helvetica&quot;&gt;&lt;img src=&quot;http://static.howstuffworks.com/gif/nat-overlap.jpg&quot;&gt;&lt;br&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;-1&quot;&gt;&lt;strong&gt;The internal IP range (237.16.32.xx) is also a
registered range used by another network. Therefore, the router is
translating the addresses to avoid a potential conflict with another
network. It will also translate the registered global IP addresses back
to the unregistered local IP addresses when information is sent to the
internal network.&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt;&lt;br&gt;&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/center&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;br&gt;
The internal network is usually a &lt;strong&gt;LAN (Local Area Network)&lt;/strong&gt;, commonly referred to as the &lt;strong&gt;stub domain&lt;/strong&gt;.
A stub domain is a LAN that uses IP addresses internally. Most of the
network traffic in a stub domain is local, so it doesn&#39;t travel outside
the internal network. A stub domain can include both registered and
unregistered IP addresses. Of course, any computers that use
unregistered IP addresses must use Network Address Translation to
communicate with the rest of the world.
&lt;/p&gt;In the next section we&#39;ll look at the different ways NAT can be configured.&lt;br&gt;&lt;p&gt;

&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;
&lt;!-- Page Break --&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;printableTocItem&quot;&gt;NAT Configuration&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;
NAT can be configured in various ways. In the example below, the NAT
router is configured to translate unregistered (inside, local) IP
addresses, that reside on the private (inside) network, to registered
IP addresses. This happens whenever a device on the inside with an
unregistered address needs to communicate with the public (outside)
network.
&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;&lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt;An ISP assigns a range of IP addresses to your company. The
assigned block of addresses are registered, unique IP addresses and are
called &lt;strong&gt;inside global addresses&lt;/strong&gt;. Unregistered, private IP addresses are split into two groups. One is a small group (&lt;strong&gt;outside local addresses&lt;/strong&gt;) that will be used by the NAT routers. The other, much larger group,  known as &lt;strong&gt;inside local addresses&lt;/strong&gt;, will be used on the stub domain. The outside local addresses are used to translate the unique IP addresses, known as &lt;strong&gt;outside global addresses&lt;/strong&gt;, of devices on the public network.
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;p&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;&lt;table align=&quot;center&quot; cellpadding=&quot;3&quot; cellspacing=&quot;0&quot; width=&quot;430&quot;&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;&lt;tr&gt;&lt;td&gt;&lt;font face=&quot;arial,helvetica&quot;&gt;
&lt;/font&gt;&lt;center&gt;&lt;font face=&quot;arial,helvetica&quot;&gt;&lt;img src=&quot;http://static.howstuffworks.com/gif/nat-address.jpg&quot;&gt;&lt;br&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;-1&quot;&gt;&lt;strong&gt;IP addresses have different designations based on
whether they are on the private network (stub domain) or on the public
network (Internet), and whether the traffic is incoming or outgoing.&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt;&lt;br&gt;&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/center&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;p&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;&lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt;Most computers on the stub domain communicate with each other using the inside local addresses.
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Some computers on the stub domain communicate a lot outside
the network. These computers have inside global addresses, which means
that they do not require translation.
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;When a computer on the stub domain that has an inside local
address wants to communicate outside the network, the packet goes to
one of the NAT routers.
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;The NAT router checks the routing table to see if it has an
entry for the destination address. If it does, the NAT router then
translates the packet and creates an entry for it in the address
translation table. If the destination address is not in the routing
table, the packet is dropped.
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Using an inside global address, the router sends the packet on to its destination.
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;A computer on the public network sends a packet to the private
network. The source address on the packet is an outside global address.
The destination address is an inside global address.
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;The NAT router looks at the address translation table and
determines that the destination address is in there, mapped to a
computer on the stub domain.
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;The NAT router translates the inside global address of the
packet to the inside local address, and sends it to the destination
computer.
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;p&gt;
NAT overloading utilizes a feature of the &lt;a href=&quot;http://computer.howstuffworks.com/nat.htm/web-server.htm&quot;&gt;TCP/IP protocol stack&lt;/a&gt;, &lt;strong&gt;multiplexing&lt;/strong&gt;, that allows a computer to maintain several concurrent connections with a remote computer (or computers) using different &lt;a href=&quot;http://computer.howstuffworks.com/nat.htm/web-server.htm&quot;&gt;TCP or UDP&lt;/a&gt; &lt;strong&gt;ports&lt;/strong&gt;. An IP packet has a header that contains the following information:
&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;&lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Source Address&lt;/strong&gt; - The IP address of the originating computer, such as 201.3.83.132
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Source Port&lt;/strong&gt; - The TCP or UDP port number assigned by the originating computer for this packet, such as Port 1080
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Destination Address&lt;/strong&gt; - The IP address of the receiving computer, such as 145.51.18.223
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Destination Port&lt;/strong&gt; - The TCP or UDP port number that the originating computer is asking the receiving computer to open, such as Port 3021
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;p&gt;The addresses specify the two machines at each end, while the port
numbers ensure that the connection between the two computers has a
unique identifier. The combination of these four numbers defines a
single TCP/IP connection. Each port number uses 16 bits, which means
that there are a possible 65,536 (2&lt;sup&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;-1&quot;&gt;16&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/sup&gt;)
values. Realistically, since different manufacturers map the ports in
slightly different ways, you can expect to have about 4,000 ports
available.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p class=&quot;printableTocItem&quot;&gt;Dynamic NAT and Overloading&lt;/p&gt;
 Here&#39;s how &lt;strong&gt;dynamic NAT&lt;/strong&gt; works: &lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt;An internal network (stub domain) has been set up with IP addresses that were not specifically allocated to that company by &lt;strong&gt;IANA&lt;/strong&gt; (&lt;a href=&quot;http://computer.howstuffworks.com/nat.htm/framed.htm?parent=nat.htm&amp;amp;url=http://www.iana.org&quot;&gt;Internet Assigned Numbers Authority&lt;/a&gt;), the global authority that hands out IP addresses. These addresses should be considered &lt;strong&gt;non-routable&lt;/strong&gt; since they are not unique. &lt;p&gt; &lt;/p&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;The company sets up a NAT-enabled router. The router has a range of unique IP addresses given to the company by IANA. &lt;p&gt; &lt;/p&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;A computer on the stub domain attempts to connect to a computer outside the network, such as a Web server. &lt;p&gt; &lt;/p&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;The router receives the packet from the computer on the stub domain. &lt;p&gt; &lt;/p&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;The router saves the computer&#39;s non-routable IP address to an &lt;strong&gt;address translation table&lt;/strong&gt;.
The router replaces the sending computer&#39;s non-routable IP address with
the first available IP address out of the range of unique IP addresses.
The translation table now has a mapping of the computer&#39;s non-routable
IP address matched with the one of the unique IP addresses. &lt;p&gt; &lt;/p&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;When
a packet comes back from the destination computer, the router checks
the destination address on the packet. It then looks in the address
translation table to see which computer on the stub domain the packet
belongs to. It changes the destination address to the one saved in the
address translation table and sends it to that computer. If it doesn&#39;t
find a match in the table, it drops the packet. &lt;p&gt; &lt;/p&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;The
computer receives the packet from the router. The process repeats as
long as the computer is communicating with the external system. &lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt; &lt;p&gt; Here&#39;s how &lt;strong&gt;overloading&lt;/strong&gt; works: &lt;/p&gt;&lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt;An
internal network (stub domain) has been set up with non-routable IP
addresses that were not specifically allocated to that company by IANA.
&lt;p&gt; &lt;/p&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;The company sets up a NAT-enabled router. The router has a unique IP address given to the company by IANA. &lt;p&gt; &lt;/p&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;A computer on the stub domain attempts to connect to a computer outside the network, such as a Web server. &lt;p&gt; &lt;/p&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;The router receives the packet from the computer on the stub domain. &lt;p&gt; &lt;/p&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;The
router saves the computer&#39;s non-routable IP address and port number to
an address translation table. The router replaces the sending
computer&#39;s non-routable IP address with the router&#39;s IP address. The
router replaces the sending computer&#39;s source port with the port number
that matches where the router saved the sending computer&#39;s address
information in the address translation table. The translation table now
has a mapping of the computer&#39;s non-routable IP address and port number
along with the router&#39;s IP address. &lt;p&gt; &lt;/p&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;When a packet
comes back from the destination computer, the router checks the
destination port on the packet. It then looks in the address
translation table to see which computer on the stub domain the packet
belongs to. It changes the destination address and destination port to
the ones saved in the address translation table and sends it to that
computer. &lt;p&gt; &lt;/p&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;The computer receives the packet from the
router. The process repeats as long as the computer is communicating
with the external system. &lt;p&gt; &lt;/p&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Since the NAT router now
has the computer&#39;s source address and source port saved to the address
translation table, it will continue to use that same port number for
the duration of the connection. A timer is reset each time the router
accesses an entry in the table. If the entry is not accessed again
before the timer expires, the entry is removed from the table. &lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;In the next section we&#39;ll look at the organization of stub domains.&lt;br&gt; &lt;p&gt;  &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt; &lt;!-- Page Break --&gt; &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;printableTocItem&quot;&gt;Stub Domains&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt; Look at this table to see how the computers on a stub domain might appear to external networks. &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt; &lt;/p&gt;&lt;table align=&quot;center&quot; bgcolor=&quot;#eef4f6&quot; border=&quot;1&quot; cellpadding=&quot;3&quot; cellspacing=&quot;1&quot;&gt; &lt;tbody&gt;&lt;tr&gt;&lt;td&gt;&lt;center&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Source&lt;br&gt;Computer&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/center&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;td&gt;&lt;center&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Source&lt;br&gt;Computer&#39;s&lt;br&gt;IP Address&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/center&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;td&gt;&lt;center&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Source&lt;br&gt;Computer&#39;s&lt;br&gt; Port&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/center&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;td&gt;&lt;center&gt;&lt;strong&gt;NAT Router&#39;s&lt;br&gt;IP Address&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/center&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;td&gt;&lt;center&gt;&lt;strong&gt;NAT Router&#39;s&lt;br&gt;Assigned&lt;br&gt;Port Number&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/center&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt;&lt;td&gt;&lt;center&gt;&lt;strong&gt;A&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/center&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;td&gt;&lt;center&gt;&lt;strong&gt;192.168.32.10&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/center&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;td&gt;&lt;center&gt;&lt;strong&gt;400&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/center&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;td&gt;&lt;center&gt;&lt;strong&gt;215.37.32.203&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/center&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;td&gt;&lt;center&gt;&lt;strong&gt;1&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/center&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt;&lt;td&gt;&lt;center&gt;&lt;strong&gt;B&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/center&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;td&gt;&lt;center&gt;&lt;strong&gt;192.168.32.13&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/center&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;td&gt;&lt;center&gt;&lt;strong&gt;50&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/center&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;td&gt;&lt;center&gt;&lt;strong&gt;215.37.32.203&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/center&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;td&gt;&lt;center&gt;&lt;strong&gt;2&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/center&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt;&lt;td&gt;&lt;center&gt;&lt;strong&gt;C&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/center&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;td&gt;&lt;center&gt;&lt;strong&gt;192.168.32.15&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/center&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;td&gt;&lt;center&gt;&lt;strong&gt;3750&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/center&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;td&gt;&lt;center&gt;&lt;strong&gt;215.37.32.203&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/center&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;td&gt;&lt;center&gt;&lt;strong&gt;3&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/center&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt;&lt;td&gt;&lt;center&gt;&lt;strong&gt;D&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/center&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;td&gt;&lt;center&gt;&lt;strong&gt;192.168.32.18&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/center&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;td&gt;&lt;center&gt;&lt;strong&gt;206&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/center&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;td&gt;&lt;center&gt;&lt;strong&gt;215.37.32.203&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/center&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;td&gt;&lt;center&gt;&lt;strong&gt;4&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/center&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;br&gt;
As you can see, the NAT router stores the IP address and port number of
each computer in the address translation table. It then replaces the IP
address with its own registered IP address and the port number
corresponding to the location, in the table, of the entry for that
packet&#39;s source computer. So any external network sees the NAT router&#39;s
IP address and the port number assigned by the router as the
source-computer information on each packet. &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt; You can still have
some computers on the stub domain that use dedicated IP addresses. You
can create an access list of IP addresses that tells the router which
computers on the network require NAT. All other IP addresses will pass
through untranslated. &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt; The number of simultaneous translations that a router will support are determined mainly by the amount of &lt;strong&gt;DRAM&lt;/strong&gt;
(Dynamic Random Access Memory) it has. But since a typical entry in the
address-translation table only takes about 160 bytes, a router with 4
MB of DRAM could theoretically process 26,214 simultaneous
translations, which is more than enough for most applications. &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;
IANA has set aside specific ranges of IP addresses for use as
non-routable, internal network addresses. These addresses are
considered &lt;strong&gt;unregistered&lt;/strong&gt; (for more information check out &lt;a href=&quot;http://computer.howstuffworks.com/nat.htm/framed.htm?parent=nat.htm&amp;amp;url=http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc1918.txt&quot;&gt;RFC 1918: Address Allocation for Private Internets&lt;/a&gt;,
which defines these address ranges). No company or agency can claim
ownership of unregistered addresses or use them on public computers.
Routers are designed to discard (instead of forward) unregistered
addresses. What this means is that a packet from a computer with an
unregistered address could reach a registered destination computer, but
the reply would be discarded by the first router it came to. &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt; There is a range for each of the three classes of IP addresses used for networking: &lt;/p&gt;&lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt;Range 1: Class A - 10.0.0.0 through 10.255.255.255 &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Range 2: Class B - 172.16.0.0 through 172.31.255.255 &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Range 3: Class C - 192.168.0.0 through 192.168.255.255 &lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Although each range is in a different class, your are not required to
use any particular range for your internal network. It is a good
practice, though, because it greatly diminishes the chance of an IP
address conflict.
&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;printableTocItem&quot;&gt;Security and Administration&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Implementing dynamic NAT automatically creates a &lt;strong&gt;firewall&lt;/strong&gt;
between your internal network and outside networks, or between your
internal network and the Internet. NAT only allows connections that
originate inside the stub domain. Essentially, this means that a
computer on an external network cannot connect to your computer unless
your computer has initiated the contact. You can browse the Internet
and connect to a site, and even download a file; but somebody else
cannot latch onto your IP address and use it to connect to a port on
your computer. &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt; In specific circumstances, Static NAT, also called &lt;strong&gt;inbound mapping&lt;/strong&gt;,
allows external devices to initiate connections to computers on the
stub domain. For instance, if you wish to go from an inside global
address to a specific inside local address that is assigned to your Web
server, Static NAT would enable the connection. &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt; &lt;/p&gt;&lt;table align=&quot;center&quot; cellpadding=&quot;3&quot; cellspacing=&quot;0&quot; width=&quot;400&quot;&gt; &lt;tbody&gt;&lt;tr&gt;&lt;td&gt;&lt;font face=&quot;arial,helvetica&quot;&gt; &lt;/font&gt;&lt;center&gt;&lt;font face=&quot;arial,helvetica&quot;&gt;&lt;img src=&quot;http://static.howstuffworks.com/gif/nat-static.jpg&quot;&gt;&lt;br&gt; &lt;font size=&quot;-1&quot;&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Static
NAT (inbound mapping) allows a computer on the stub domain to maintain
a specific address when communicating with devices outside the network.&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt;&lt;br&gt;&lt;/font&gt; &lt;/center&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;
Some NAT routers provide for extensive filtering and traffic logging.
Filtering allows your company to control what type of sites employees
visit on the Web, preventing them from viewing questionable material.
You can use traffic logging to create a log file of what sites are
visited and generate various reports from it. &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt; NAT is sometimes confused with &lt;strong&gt;proxy servers&lt;/strong&gt;,
but there are definite differences between them. NAT is transparent to
the source and to destination computers. Neither one realizes that it
is dealing with a third device. But a proxy server is not transparent.
The source computer knows that it is making a request to the proxy
server and must be configured to do so. The destination computer thinks
that the proxy server &lt;strong&gt;IS&lt;/strong&gt; the source computer, and deals with it directly. Also, proxy servers usually work at layer 4 (transport) of the &lt;a href=&quot;http://computer.howstuffworks.com/nat.htm/osi.htm&quot;&gt;OSI Reference Model&lt;/a&gt;
or higher, while NAT is a layer 3 (network) protocol. Working at a
higher layer makes proxy servers slower than NAT devices in most cases.
&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt; &lt;/p&gt;&lt;table align=&quot;center&quot; cellpadding=&quot;3&quot; cellspacing=&quot;0&quot; width=&quot;400&quot;&gt; &lt;tbody&gt;&lt;tr&gt;&lt;td&gt;&lt;font face=&quot;arial,helvetica&quot;&gt; &lt;/font&gt;&lt;center&gt;&lt;font face=&quot;arial,helvetica&quot;&gt;&lt;img src=&quot;http://static.howstuffworks.com/gif/nat-osi.jpg&quot;&gt;&lt;br&gt; &lt;font size=&quot;-1&quot;&gt;&lt;strong&gt;NAT operates at the Network layer (layer 3) of the OSI Reference Model -- this is the layer that routers work at.&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt;&lt;br&gt;&lt;/font&gt; &lt;/center&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt; A real benefit of NAT is apparent in &lt;strong&gt;network administration&lt;/strong&gt;.
For example, you can move your Web server or FTP server to another host
computer without having to worry about broken links. Simply change the
inbound mapping at the router to reflect the new host. You can also
make changes to your internal network easily, because the only external
IP address either belongs to the router or comes from a pool of global
addresses. &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt; NAT and DHCP (dynamic host configuration protocol )
are a natural fit. You can choose a range of unregistered IP addresses
for your stub domain and have the DHCP server dole them out as
necessary. It also makes it much easier to scale up your network as
your needs grow. You don&#39;t have to request more IP addresses from IANA.
Instead, you can just increase the range of available IP addresses
configured in DHCP to immediately have room for additional computers on
your network. &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;  &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt; &lt;!-- Page Break --&gt; &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;printableTocItem&quot;&gt;Multi-homing&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;As
businesses rely more and more on the Internet, having multiple points
of connection to the Internet is fast becoming an integral part of
their network strategy. Multiple connections, known as &lt;strong&gt;multi-homing&lt;/strong&gt;, reduces the chance of a potentially catastrophic shutdown if one of the connections should fail.  &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;  In addition to maintaining a reliable connection, multi-homing allows a company to perform &lt;strong&gt;load-balancing&lt;/strong&gt;
by lowering the number of computers connecting to the Internet through
any single connection. Distributing the load through multiple
connections optimizes the performance and can significantly decrease
wait times. &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;  Multi-homed networks are often connected to several different &lt;strong&gt;ISPs&lt;/strong&gt; (Internet Service Providers). Each ISP assigns an IP address (or range of IP addresses) to the company. Routers use &lt;strong&gt;BGP&lt;/strong&gt;
(Border Gateway Protocol), a part of the TCP/IP protocol suite, to
route between networks using different protocols. In a multi-homed
network, the router utilizes &lt;strong&gt;IBGP&lt;/strong&gt; (Internal Border Gateway Protocol) on the stub domain side, and &lt;strong&gt;EBGP&lt;/strong&gt; (External Border Gateway Protocol) to communicate with other routers.  &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;
Multi-homing really makes a difference if one of the connections to an
ISP fails. As soon as the router assigned to connect to that ISP
determines that the connection is down, it will reroute all data
through one of the other routers. &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;  NAT can be used to facilitate scalable routing for multi-homed, multi-provider connectivity. For more on multi-homing, see &lt;a href=&quot;http://computer.howstuffworks.com/nat.htm/framed.htm?parent=nat.htm&amp;amp;url=http://www.cisco.com/warp/public/cc/pd/iosw/ioft/ionetn/tech/emios_wp.htm&quot;&gt;Cisco: Enabling Enterprise Multihoming&lt;/a&gt;.  &lt;/p&gt;</description>
    
    <category domain="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/CCNADocs">CCNA Docs</category>
    
    
    <ent:cloud ent:href="">
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="NAT" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=NAT">NAT</ent:topic>
    
    </ent:cloud>
    
    
    
  </item>
  
  <item>
    <dc:creator>sparky</dc:creator>
    <title>Configure DHCP on a Cisco Router</title>
    <link>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/8/7/4280713.html</link>
    <guid>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/8/7/4280713.html</guid>
    <pubDate>Fri, 07 Aug 2009 08:20:00 +0100</pubDate>
    <description>&lt;span style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;font-weight: bold; text-decoration: underline;&quot;&gt;Configure DHCP on a Cisco Router&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;Steps are as follows&lt;/span&gt;:&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;1. Define the DHCP address pool,&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;Router(config)#&lt;strong&gt;ip dhcp pool POOLNAME&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;Router(dhcp-config)#&lt;strong&gt;network XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX YYY.YYY.YYY.YYY&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;where,&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX is the network address to be used by the
DHCP pool&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;YYY.YYY.YYY.YYY is the subnet mask for the network.&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;You can replace the subnet mask by a (/PREFIX) to provide
the subnet mask.&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;2. Configure the parameters to be sent to the client,&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;Router(dhcp-config)#&lt;strong&gt;dns-server XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;To provide the DNS server IP address&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;Router(dhcp-config)#&lt;strong&gt;default-router XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;To provide the IP address of the default gateway&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;Router(dhcp-config)#&lt;strong&gt;domain-name NAME&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;To provide the name of the domain of the network (if in a
domain environment)&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;Router(dhcp-config)#&lt;strong&gt;netbios-name-server XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;To provide the IP address of the NetBIOS name server&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;Router(dhcp-config)#&lt;strong&gt;lease DAYS HOURS MINUTES&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;To define the lease time of the addresses given to the
client. You can make it infinite by using this command instead; &lt;strong&gt;lease infinite&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;There is a large group of settings that you can configure to
be sent to the clients, and I have only mentioned the most frequently used.&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;3. Configure the IP addresses to be excluded from the pool.
This is usually done to avoid the conflicts caused by the DHCP with servers and
printers. Remember to give ALL servers and network printers static IP addresses
in the same range of the DHCP pool. And then exclude these addresses from the
pool to avoid conflicts.&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;Router(config)#&lt;strong&gt;ip dhcp excluded-address XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;Use the command in the previous form to excluded a single
address. You can repeat it as much as you see fit for the IP addresses you want
to exclude. Or,&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;Router(config)#&lt;strong&gt;ip dhcp excluded-address YYY.YYY.YYY.YYY
ZZZ.ZZZ.ZZZ.ZZZ&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;where,&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;YYY.YYY.YYY.YYY is the start of the range to be excluded
from the pool&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;ZZZ.ZZZ.ZZZ.ZZZ is the end of the range&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;This way you can exclude a range or ranges of IP addresses
and reserve them for static addresses use.&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;4. Enable the DHCP service in the router&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;Router(config)#&lt;strong&gt;service dhcp&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;To disable it use&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;Router(config)#&lt;strong&gt;no service dhcp&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;Usually the DHCP service is enabled by default on your
router.&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;5. Use the following commands to check the DHCP operation on
the router:&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;Router#&lt;strong&gt;show ip dhcp binding&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;This command shows the current bindings of addresses given
to clients&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;Router#&lt;strong&gt;show ip dhcp server statistics&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;This command show the DHCP server statistics.&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;Router#&lt;strong&gt;debug ip dhcp server&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;This debug command is used to troubleshoot DHCP issues.&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;Implementation notes:&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;1. If you have a DHCP server other than the router, and you
would like to let the router to forward the DHCP requests from a certain LAN to
the DHCP server laying outside that LAN, go to the Ethernet interface that does
not have the DHCP server and type the following command:&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;Router(config-if)#&lt;strong&gt;ip helper-address XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;where XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX is the IP address of the server laying
outside this LAN.&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;2. You can create a DHCP database agent that stores the DHCP
binding database. A DHCP database agent is any host, for example, an FTP, TFTP,
or RCP server that stores the DHCP bindings database. You can configure
multiple DHCP database agents and you can configure the interval between
database updates and transfers for each agent. To configure a database agent
and database agent parameters, use the following command in global
configuration mode:&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;Router(config)#&lt;strong&gt;ip dhcp database url [timeout
seconds | write-delay seconds]&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;An example url is this&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;ftp://user:password @ 192.168.0.3/router-dhcp (&lt;/font&gt;remove the spaces before implementing)
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;If you choose not to configure a DHCP database agent,
disable the recording of DHCP address conflicts on the DHCP server. To disable
DHCP address conflict logging, use the following command in global
configuration mode:&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;Router(config)#&lt;strong&gt;no ip dhcp conflict
logging&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;3. DHCP service uses port &lt;strong&gt;67&lt;/strong&gt; and &lt;strong&gt;68&lt;/strong&gt;. So, if you are using a
firewall, remember to open these ports.&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;4. To clear DHCP server variables, use the
following commands as needed:&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;Router#&lt;strong&gt;clear ip dhcp binding *&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;If you want to clear a certain binding not all of them,
replace the * in the previous command with the IP address to be cleared.&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;MsoNormal&quot;&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;Router#&lt;strong&gt;clear ip dhcp server statistics&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;----------------------------------------&lt;br&gt;Article courtesy of www.routergeek.com&lt;br&gt;</description>
    
    <category domain="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/CCNADocs">CCNA Docs</category>
    
    
    <ent:cloud ent:href="">
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="DHCP" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=DHCP">DHCP</ent:topic>
    
    </ent:cloud>
    
    
    
  </item>
  
  <item>
    <dc:creator>sparky</dc:creator>
    <title>Quick CatOS Configuration Guide</title>
    <link>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/7/13/4253876.html</link>
    <guid>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/7/13/4253876.html</guid>
    <pubDate>Mon, 13 Jul 2009 15:25:00 +0100</pubDate>
    <description>&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;text-decoration: underline;&quot;&gt;Quick CatOS Configuration Guide&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Platform: - &lt;/strong&gt;Cisco 6509 catos&lt;strong&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br&gt;
            &lt;strong&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Author&lt;/strong&gt;: - &amp;nbsp;Surender  Singh&lt;strong&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
      &lt;ol&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Setting the IP address and default  gateway of the switch&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;
          &lt;ol&gt;&lt;li&gt;# set int sc0 {ipaddress} {subnet  mask}&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;# set route default {ipaddress}&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;
          &lt;ol&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;&amp;nbsp;For setting the name of ports for each module.&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;
          &lt;ol&gt;&lt;li&gt;# set port name {mod-num/port-num}  {name}&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;
          &lt;ol&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;For Setting the port Speed&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;
          &lt;ol&gt;&lt;li&gt;# set port speed {mod-num/port-num}  auto&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;
          &lt;ol&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;For setting the port in half duplex  or full duplex&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;
          &lt;ol&gt;&lt;li&gt;# set port duplex {mod-num/port-num}  {half/full}&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;
          &lt;ol&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;For setting the ports for flow  control for controlling the traffic or delay of traffic&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;
          &lt;ol&gt;&lt;li&gt;# set port flow control  {mod-num/port-num} Send ON (the port will send Flow control to far end.)&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;# set port flow control  {mod-num/port-num} Receive ON (the port will require far end to send  flow control)&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;
          &lt;ol&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Port Negotiation before establishing  a link&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;
          &lt;p&gt;1) #&amp;nbsp; Set port negotiation  {mod-num/port-num}{enable/disable}&lt;br&gt;
        2) #show  port&lt;/p&gt;
          &lt;ol&gt;&lt;li&gt;Clear
config all will clear out all the config and all ports will collapse
into VLAN1 which will cause instability. In order to avoid this all the
ports are put into a blocking state.&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;
          &lt;ol&gt;&lt;li&gt;# set default port status &lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;
          &lt;ol&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;&amp;nbsp;Configuring Ether Channels&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;
          &lt;p&gt;In
this all Ethernet links are grouped together to form one Ether Channel.
A max of 8 Ether links can join a Admin Group. Port Aggression Protocol
communicates by exchanging packets between the ports to establish a
link; it adds the Ether channel to a spanning tree as one single bridge
port to avoid loops.&lt;/p&gt;
          &lt;ol&gt;&lt;li&gt;# set port channel  {mod-num/port-num} {admin-group(1-1024}&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;# set port chaneel  {mod-num/port-num} { auto|desirable}&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;
          &lt;p&gt;3) #set  port channel all distribution {ipaddress|mac address} {source|destination}&lt;br&gt;
            4) # Show  port channel&lt;/p&gt;
          &lt;ol&gt;&lt;li&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;strong&gt;Configuring Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1  d)&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;
          &lt;p&gt;In a  switched network only a single path must exist between two stations .Each vlan  has its STP defined.&lt;br&gt;
            If multiple  patches exists between two stations loops can occur.&lt;/p&gt;
          &lt;p&gt;STP
spans the extended switch network and force certain redundant paths
into a standby or blocked state if any of the link goes down then the
blocked path comes into forwarding state .All switches participate in a
STP by exchanging Bridge protocol data units .the BPDU contains
information of the switch ,port mac-address, priority, cost. This is
used to elect the root switch.&lt;/p&gt;
          &lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Enabling  STP on VLAN&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
          &lt;ol&gt;&lt;li&gt;# Set spantree enable {vlan_num}&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;
          &lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Changing  the port priority for putting it into forwarding state&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
          &lt;ol&gt;&lt;li&gt;# set spantree port priority  {mod-num/port-num} {priority}&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&amp;nbsp;# set spantree port vlan priority  {mod-num/port-num} {priority} {vlan-num}&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;
          &lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Changing  the port cost &lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
          &lt;ol&gt;&lt;li&gt;#set spantree port cost  {mod-num/port-num} {cost}&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;#set spantree port vlan cost  {mod-num/port-num} {cost} {vlan_num}&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;
          &lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Configure a  switch for root &amp;amp; secondary root&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
          &lt;ol&gt;&lt;li&gt;#set spantree root {Vlans} dia 4&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;#set spantree root secondary {Vlans}  dia 5 hello 1&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;
          &lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Disabling  Spantree&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
          &lt;ol&gt;&lt;li&gt;#set spantree disable&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;
          &lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;How Port Fast works&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
          &lt;p&gt;By enabling  port fast the port does not wait for the STP to converge and always remain in  the forwarding state&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Portfast BPDU Guard&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
          &lt;p&gt;It
can prevent loops by moving a non trunking port into the Errdisable
state when a BPDU is received on that port. When this is enabled STP
shuts down the port.&lt;/p&gt;
          &lt;p&gt; &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt; &lt;!-- Adsense in the middle of Content Starts --&gt;
&lt;script type=&quot;text/javascript&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
	google_ad_client = &quot;pub-7968552019151527&quot;;
	google_ad_width = 336;
	google_ad_height = 280;
	google_ad_format = &quot;336x280_as&quot;;
	google_ad_type = &quot;text_image&quot;;
	//2007-10-09: middle
	google_ad_channel = &quot;6223936077&quot;;
	google_color_border = &quot;FFFFFF&quot;;
	google_color_bg = &quot;FFFFFF&quot;;
	google_color_link = &quot;3E9722&quot;;
	google_color_text = &quot;666666&quot;;
	google_color_url = &quot;7F7F7F&quot;;
	//--&gt;
&lt;/script&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
	&lt;script type=&quot;text/javascript&quot; src=&quot;http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js&quot;&gt;
	&lt;/script&gt;&lt;script&gt;google_protectAndRun(&quot;ads_core.google_render_ad&quot;, google_handleError, google_render_ad);&lt;/script&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Configuring  Spatree portfast&lt;/strong&gt;
          &lt;ol&gt;&lt;li&gt;#set spantree portfast  {mod-num/port-num} enable&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;#set spantree portfast bpdu-guard  enable&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;#set
spantree uplinkfast enable(if the interface goes down between two
switches ,uplink fast enables a blocked state interface directly into
forwarding state).&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;#set spantree backbonefast enable  (it enables an indirect link into forwarding state).&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;
          &lt;ol&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Configuring  VTP&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;
          &lt;ol&gt;&lt;li&gt;#set  VTP domain {name}&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;#set  VTP mode {server|client|transparent}&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;#set  VTP password &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;#set  VTP V2 enable&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;#set  VTP purn eligible {Vlan Range}&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;#show  trunks (verifies that appropriate Vlans are trunked)&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;#show  VTP statistics&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;
          &lt;ol&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Configuring VLAN&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;
          &lt;ol&gt;&lt;li&gt;#set  Vlan {Vlan number (2-1000)} name {name}&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;
          &lt;p&gt;VLAN
1 is by default the inband (SC0) interface of a switch ,by which any
switch can be accessed without going thru the router.&lt;/p&gt;
          &lt;ol&gt;&lt;li&gt;#set  Vlan {vlan number} {mod-num/port-num}&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;
          &lt;p&gt;Valid range  of Vlans for ISL is 1-1000; valid range for IEEE 802.1q is 0-4095&lt;/p&gt;
          &lt;p&gt;If
non-Cisco devices r connected to Cisco devices thru 802.1q trunks, we
must Map 802.1q Vlan numbers greater than 1000 to ISL Vlan numbers
.802.1q vlan numbers in the range of 1-1000 r automatically mapped to
ISL vlan .If greater than 1000 it has to be mapped manually to be
recognized by Cisco switches. Upto 16 802.1q Vlans can be configured to
ISL VLANs &lt;/p&gt;
          &lt;ol&gt;&lt;li&gt;#SET Vlan Mapping dot1q {vlan  number} ISL {Vlan number}&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;
          &lt;ol&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Trunking (Important)&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;
          &lt;p&gt;Configuring  an ISL or dot1q trunk&lt;/p&gt;
          &lt;ol&gt;&lt;li&gt;#  set trunk {mod-num/port-num} {auto|desirable|ON|OFF} dot1q&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;
          &lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Negotiation&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
          &lt;ol&gt;&lt;li&gt;#set trunk {mod-num/port-num} desirable (mode) negotiate  (dot1q or ISL) (assuming that the end port is in auto mode)&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;
          &lt;p&gt;By default all Vlans are allowed when a trunk is set.&lt;br&gt;
            To disallow specific trunks &lt;/p&gt;
          &lt;ol&gt;&lt;li&gt;#clear trunk {mod-num/port-num}  {vlan range}&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;# set trunk {mod-num/port-num} {vlan  number or range}&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;# sh trunk {mod-num/port-num}&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;
          &lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Disabling Trunk port&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
          &lt;ol&gt;&lt;li&gt;#set trunk {mod-num/port-num} OFF  (turns trunking OFF on the port)&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;#clear trunk {mod-num/port-num}&amp;nbsp; (puts the port its default trunking)&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;
          &lt;ol&gt;&lt;li&gt;GVRP: Generic attribute registration  protocol&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;-------------------------&lt;br&gt;article courtesy of&amp;nbsp; www.knowurtech.com&lt;br&gt;</description>
    
    <category domain="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog">Main Page</category>
    
    <category domain="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/GeneralNetworking">General Networking</category>
    
    
    <ent:cloud ent:href="">
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="CatOS" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=CatOS">CatOS</ent:topic>
    
    </ent:cloud>
    
    
    
  </item>
  
  <item>
    <dc:creator>sparky</dc:creator>
    <title>VRF - Virtual Routing and Forwarding</title>
    <link>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/2/26/4105257.html</link>
    <guid>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/2/26/4105257.html</guid>
    <pubDate>Mon, 13 Jul 2009 09:54:00 +0100</pubDate>
    <description>&lt;span style=&quot;font-weight: bold; text-decoration: underline;&quot;&gt;Virtual Routing and Forwarding&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
Virtual routing and forwarding (VRF) is a technology included in IP&lt;br&gt;
(Internet Protocol) network routers that allows multiple instances of a&lt;br&gt;
routing table to exist in a router and work simultaneously. This&lt;br&gt;
increases functionality by allowing network paths to be segmented&lt;br&gt;
without using multiple devices. Because traffic is automatically&lt;br&gt;
segregated, VRF also increases network security and can eliminate the&lt;br&gt;
need for encryption and authentication. Internet service providers&lt;br&gt;
(ISPs) often take advantage of VRF to create separate virtual private&lt;br&gt;
networks (VPNs) for customers; thus the technology is also referred to&lt;br&gt;
as VPN routing and forwarding.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
VRF acts like a logical router, but while a logical router may include&lt;br&gt;
many routing tables, a VRF instance uses only a single routing table.&lt;br&gt;
In addition, VRF requires a forwarding table that designates the next&lt;br&gt;
hop for each data packet, a list of devices that may be called upon to&lt;br&gt;
forward the packet, and a set of rules and routing protocols that&lt;br&gt;
govern how the packet is forwarded. These tables prevent traffic from&lt;br&gt;
being forwarded outside a specific VRF path and also keep out traffic&lt;br&gt;
that should remain outside the VRF path.</description>
    
    <category domain="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/Ciscoterms">Cisco terms</category>
    
    <category domain="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/GeneralNetworking">General Networking</category>
    
    
    <ent:cloud ent:href="">
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="VRF" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=VRF">VRF</ent:topic>
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="Routing" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=Routing">Routing</ent:topic>
    
    </ent:cloud>
    
    
    
  </item>
  
  <item>
    <dc:creator>sparky</dc:creator>
    <title>Configuring VPN Routing and Forwarding</title>
    <link>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/7/13/4253562.html</link>
    <guid>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/7/13/4253562.html</guid>
    <pubDate>Mon, 13 Jul 2009 08:51:00 +0100</pubDate>
    <description>&lt;font size=&quot;3&quot;&gt;&lt;span class=&quot;a4&quot;&gt;&lt;h1 class=&quot;a4&quot;&gt;&lt;b&gt;Configuring a VRF&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/h1&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/font&gt;Doug Downer&lt;br&gt; 11.01.2005&lt;br&gt;
			
			  &lt;!-- Vignette V/5 Wed Jul 08 06:42:38 2009 --&gt;
&lt;!-- calculation component --&gt;


 


&lt;!-- searchEnterpriseWAN.techtarget.com, searchEnterpriseWAN, generated on July 08, 2009, by mojo--&gt;&lt;img src=&quot;http://media.techtarget.com/searchEnterpriseWAN/images/spacer.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; width=&quot;1&quot; height=&quot;15&quot;&gt;&lt;br&gt;
	&lt;!-- RSS End --&gt;

  &lt;img src=&quot;http://media.techtarget.com/searchEnterpriseWAN/images/spacer.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; width=&quot;1&quot; height=&quot;1&quot;&gt;&lt;br&gt;
			
				
					
					 &lt;span class=&quot;a3&quot;&gt;
							
								
								
									&lt;script language=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
										ttWriteMboxDiv(&#39;searchEnterpriseWAN_Tip_Content_Body&#39;);
										ttWriteMboxContent(&#39;searchEnterpriseWAN_Tip_Content_Body&#39;);
									&lt;/script&gt;										
								 
In a recent tip called &lt;a href=&quot;http://searchnetworking.techtarget.com/tip/1,289483,sid7_gci1131128,00.html&quot;&gt;Keeping it all separate with VRFs&lt;/a&gt;,
I started talking about an increasingly common scenario which involves
the requirement to separate customers on shared devices using VPN
Routing and Forwarding (VRF) instances. VRFs allow us to logically
separate L2 and L3 functions for customers which share common network
devices. This separation also allows service providers the ability to
separate customers on their backbone with other technologies such as &lt;a href=&quot;http://searchnetworking.techtarget.com/gDefinition/0,294236,sid7_gci214350,00.html&quot;&gt;MPLS&lt;/a&gt;.
MPLS is not within the scope of this series so we&#39;ll stick to just the
VRF for now. In this tip, I&#39;ll show you how to configure a VRF using
the scenario we looked at &lt;a href=&quot;http://searchnetworking.techtarget.com/tip/1,289483,sid7_gci1131128,00.html&quot;&gt;before&lt;/a&gt;. 
&lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;Scenario recap&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;
We have been looking at a scenario involving the requirement for two
customers (A and B) to be given Internet access from a service provider
(you). Because of the relatively small size of the service provider and
customer -- one shared network device was installed to support this
requirement. At first glance this scenario allows for the networks of
Customer A and Customer B to mix together. To prevent that, the service
provider puts each customer within a VRF.
&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;img src=&quot;http://media.techtarget.com/digitalguide/images/Misc/vrfs_fig_1.gif&quot;&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;Creating the VRF&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The actual configuration of a VRF
is not a difficult task. There are two main components to a VRF: The
route distinguisher and the route target. A &lt;b&gt;route distinguisher&lt;/b&gt; (RD) is a number -- which doesn&#39;t
actually have any real significance other than to help identify a VPN
in a provider&#39;s network and allow for overlapping IP space. The RD is
an 8-byte number with two parts: A 2-byte type field followed by a
6-byte value field. Without going into too much detail, the value field
of the RD is most often represented as an &lt;a href=&quot;http://searchnetworking.techtarget.com/gDefinition/0,294236,sid7_gci213662,00.html&quot;&gt;autonomous system&lt;/a&gt;
number (ASN 2 bytes) followed by an arbitrary number (4 bytes) or an IP
address (4 bytes) followed by an arbitrary number (2 bytes). You can
enter an RD in either of these formats: &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;i&gt;16-bit AS number: your 32-bit number&lt;/i&gt;&lt;br&gt;
For example, 101:3. &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;
&lt;i&gt;32-bit IP address: your 16-bit number&lt;/i&gt;&lt;br&gt;
For example, 192.168.122.15:1. &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;
The &lt;b&gt;route target&lt;/b&gt;
(RT) indicates the VPN membership of a route and allows VPN routes to
be imported or exported into or out of your VRFs. The RT functions a
little like a routing policy -- determining how routes are distributed
throughout the particular VPN. Like the RD, the RT is 8 bytes in length
and can be entered as:&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;
&lt;i&gt;16-bit AS number: your 32-bit number&lt;/i&gt;&lt;br&gt;
For example, 101:3. &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;
&lt;i&gt;32-bit IP address: your 16-bit number&lt;/i&gt;&lt;br&gt;
For example, 192.168.122.15:1. &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;
Using the example scenario, let&#39;s configure two VRFs on the service
provider router. Customer A will have an RD of 192.168.1.1:100 and
Customer B will have an RD of 192.168.2.1:200&lt;/p&gt;&lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt;Customer A&lt;code&gt;
&lt;br&gt;SP_Router(config)#interface loopback 1
&lt;br&gt;SP_Router(config-if)#description Loopback interface for Customer_A VRF
&lt;br&gt;SP_Router(config)#interface g0/0
&lt;br&gt;SP_Router(config-if)#description Connection to the Customer_A router
&lt;br&gt;SP_Router(config)#ip vrf Customer_A
&lt;br&gt;SP_Router(config-vrf)#rd 192.168.1.1:100
&lt;br&gt;SP_Router(config-vrf)#route-target import 192.168.1.255:100
&lt;br&gt;SP_Router(config-vrf)#route-target export 192.168.1.255:100&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;p&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;&lt;li&gt;Customer B&lt;code&gt;
&lt;br&gt;SP_Router(config)#interface loopback 2
&lt;br&gt;SP_Router(config-if)#description Loopback interface for Customer_B VRF
&lt;br&gt;SP_Router(config)#interface g0/1
&lt;br&gt;SP_Router(config-if)#description Connection to the Customer_B router
&lt;br&gt;SP_Router(config)#ip vrf Customer_B
&lt;br&gt;SP_Router(config-vrf)#rd 192.168.2.1:200
&lt;br&gt;SP_Router(config-vrf)#route-target import 192.168.2.255:200
&lt;br&gt;SP_Router(config-vrf)#route-target export 192.168.2.255:200&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;Assigning the interfaces&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;
Once you have created the VRF you can begin to assign the particular
interfaces and start to separate the customers. Notice I did &lt;i&gt;not&lt;/i&gt;
assign an IP address to the interfaces which are intended to be in the
VRF. If you put the IP addresses on prior to putting the interface in
the VRF, the IP address will be removed and cause you to have to re-IP
the interfaces.
&lt;/p&gt;&lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt;Customer A&lt;code&gt;
&lt;br&gt;SP_Router(config)#interface lo1
&lt;br&gt;SP_Router(config-if)#ip vrf forwarding Customer_A
&lt;br&gt;SP_Router(config-if)#ip address 192.168.1.1 255.255.255.255
&lt;br&gt;SP_Router(config)#interface g0/0
&lt;br&gt;SP_Router(config-if)#ip vrf forwarding Customer_A
&lt;br&gt;SP_Router(config-if)#ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.252
&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;p&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;&lt;li&gt;Customer B
 &lt;code&gt;
&lt;br&gt;SP_Router(config)#interface lo2
&lt;br&gt;SP_Router(config-if)#ip vrf forwarding Customer_B
&lt;br&gt;SP_Router(config-if)#ip address 192.168.2.1 255.255.255.255
&lt;br&gt;SP_Router(config)#interface g0/1
&lt;br&gt;SP_Router(config-if)#ip vrf forwarding Customer_B
&lt;br&gt;SP_Router(config-if)#ip address 10.1.2.1 255.255.255.252
&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;p&gt;
These configurations have modified our picture somewhat. The figure below shows what the things look like now: 
&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;img src=&quot;http://media.techtarget.com/digitalguide/images/Misc/vrfs_fig_2.gif&quot;&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;

You can verify your configurations by using the &lt;i&gt;show ip vrf&lt;/i&gt; command:
&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;
&lt;table border=&quot;3&quot; cellpadding=&quot;3&quot; cellspacing=&quot;2&quot; width=&quot;400&quot;&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;&lt;tr&gt;&lt;td colspan=&quot;3&quot;&gt; SP_Router #show ip vrf &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;&lt;td&gt;  &lt;b&gt;Name&lt;/b&gt;  &lt;/td&gt;                         &lt;td&gt; &lt;b&gt;Default RD&lt;/b&gt;  &lt;/td&gt;        &lt;td&gt; &lt;b&gt;Interfaces&lt;/b&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;
 &lt;tr&gt;&lt;td&gt; Customer_A &lt;/td&gt;  &lt;td&gt; 192.168.1.1:100 &lt;/td&gt;   &lt;td&gt; Loopback1 &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;
        &lt;tr&gt;&lt;td&gt;    &lt;br&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;td&gt; &lt;br&gt;&lt;/td&gt;                                            &lt;td&gt; GigabitEthernet0/0&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;&lt;td&gt; Customer_B &lt;/td&gt;  &lt;td&gt;192.168.2.1:200 &lt;/td&gt;   &lt;td&gt; Loopback2&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;&lt;td&gt;    &lt;br&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;td&gt; &lt;br&gt;&lt;/td&gt;             &lt;td&gt;GigabitEthernet0/1&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Once you have the proper interfaces within the correct VRF, you
can begin to establish IP connectivity and routing between the customer
routers and the service provider routers.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;--------------------------------------&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;article courtesy of searchenterprisewan.com&lt;br&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/span&gt;</description>
    
    <category domain="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog">Main Page</category>
    
    <category domain="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/GeneralNetworking">General Networking</category>
    
    
    <ent:cloud ent:href="">
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="VRF" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=VRF">VRF</ent:topic>
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="Routing" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=Routing">Routing</ent:topic>
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="OSPF" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=OSPF">OSPF</ent:topic>
    
    </ent:cloud>
    
    
    
  </item>
  
  <item>
    <dc:creator>sparky</dc:creator>
    <title>Access Control Lists</title>
    <link>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/7/1/4241717.html</link>
    <guid>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/7/1/4241717.html</guid>
    <pubDate>Wed, 01 Jul 2009 15:12:00 +0100</pubDate>
    <description>&lt;h1&gt;Cisco Access Control Lists (ACL)&lt;/h1&gt;

	&lt;p class=&quot;note&quot;&gt;By Joshua Erdman&lt;br&gt;
	Digital Foundation, inc.&lt;/p&gt;

        &lt;p&gt;The Cisco access control list (&lt;span8969383&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;javascript:void(0);&quot; style=&quot;color: rgb(0, 15, 255); text-decoration: underline;&quot; id=&quot;Y8969383S0&quot;&gt;ACL&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/span8969383&gt;) is probably the most commonly used object in the IOS.  It is not only used for
	&lt;span8969383&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;javascript:void(0);&quot; style=&quot;color: rgb(0, 15, 255); text-decoration: underline;&quot; id=&quot;Y8969383S3&quot;&gt;packet&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/span8969383&gt; &lt;span8969383&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;javascript:void(0);&quot; style=&quot;color: rgb(0, 15, 255); text-decoration: underline;&quot; id=&quot;Y8969383S6&quot;&gt;filtering&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/span8969383&gt; (a type of firewall) but also for selecting types of &lt;span8969383&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;javascript:void(0);&quot; style=&quot;color: rgb(0, 15, 255); text-decoration: underline;&quot; id=&quot;Y8969383S4&quot;&gt;traffic&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/span8969383&gt; to be analyzed, forwarded, or influenced in
	some way.&lt;/p&gt;

	&lt;h2&gt;Access Control List Types&lt;/h2&gt;
	&lt;p&gt;Cisco ACLs are divided into types.  Standard IP, Extended IP, IPX, Appletalk, etc.  Here we will just go 
	over the standard and extended access lists for &lt;span8969383&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;javascript:void(0);&quot; style=&quot;color: rgb(0, 15, 255); text-decoration: underline;&quot; id=&quot;Y8969383S1&quot;&gt;TCP&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/span8969383&gt;/IP.&lt;/p&gt;

	&lt;p&gt;As you create ACLs you assign a number to each list, however, each type of list 
	is limited to an assigned range of numbers.  This makes it very easy to determine what type of ACL you will be 
	working with.&lt;/p&gt;

	&lt;h2&gt;TCP/IP Access Lists&lt;/h2&gt;
	&lt;p&gt;You
can have up to 99 Standard IP Access Lists ranging in number from 1 to
99, the Extended IP Access Lists number range is assigned from 100 to
199. The most common use of the Extended IP access list to is create a
packet filtering firewall. This is where you specify the allowed
destinations of each packet from an allowed source.&lt;/p&gt;

	&lt;h2&gt;Standard IP Access Lists&lt;/h2&gt;
	&lt;p&gt;A Standard Access List only allows you to permit or deny traffic from specific IP addresses.  The destination of the 
	packet and the ports involved do not matter.&lt;/p&gt;

	&lt;p&gt;Here is an example:&lt;/p&gt;
	&lt;p class=&quot;code&quot;&gt;access-list 10 permit 192.168.3.0 0.0.0.255&lt;/p&gt;

	&lt;p&gt;This list allows traffic from all addresses in the range 192.168.3.0 to 192.168.3.255&lt;/p&gt;

	&lt;p&gt;You can see how the last entry looks similar to a subnet mask, but with Cisco ACLs they use inverse subnet masks.  
	Also realize that by default, there is an implicit deny added to every access list.  If you entered the command:&lt;br&gt;
	show access-list 10&lt;br&gt;The output would be:&lt;/p&gt;

	&lt;p class=&quot;code&quot;&gt;access-list 10 permit 192.168.3.0 0.0.0.255&lt;br&gt;
	access-list 10 deny any&lt;/p&gt;

	&lt;h2&gt;Extended IP Access Lists&lt;/h2&gt;
	&lt;p&gt;Extended ACLs allow you to permit or deny traffic from specific IP addresses to a specific destination
	IP address and port.  It also allows you to specify different types of traffic such as &lt;span8969383&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;javascript:void(0);&quot; style=&quot;color: rgb(0, 15, 255); text-decoration: underline;&quot; id=&quot;Y8969383S9&quot;&gt;ICMP&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/span8969383&gt;, TCP, UDP, etc. Needless
	to say, it is very grangular and allows you to be very specific.  If you intend to create a packet
	filtering firewall to protect your network it is an Extended ACL that you will need to create.&lt;/p&gt;

	&lt;p&gt;Typically
you would allow outgoing traffic and incoming initiated traffic. In
other words, you want your users to be able to connect to web servers
on the internet for browsing but you do not want anyone on the Internet
to be able to connect to your machines. This will require 2 ACLs. One
to only limit our users on the company network to only use a web
browser (so this will block outgoing FTP, e-mail, Kazaa, napster,
online gaming, etc.) The other access-list will only allow incoming
traffic from the Internet that has been initiated from a machine on the
inside. This is called an established connection. Let&#39;s see what our
access list would look like for starters:&lt;/p&gt;

	&lt;p class=&quot;code&quot;&gt;&lt;b&gt;Assumptions&lt;/b&gt;:&lt;br&gt;internal network: 63.36.9.0&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;
	access-list 101 - Applied to traffic leaving &lt;span8969383&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;javascript:void(0);&quot; style=&quot;color: rgb(0, 15, 255); text-decoration: underline;&quot; id=&quot;Y8969383S5&quot;&gt;the office&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/span8969383&gt; (outgoing)&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;
	access-list 102 - Applied to traffic entering the office (incoming)&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;

	&lt;b&gt;ACL 101&lt;/b&gt;&lt;br&gt;
	access-list 101 permit tcp 63.36.9.0 0.0.0.255 any eq 80&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;

	&lt;b&gt;ACL 102&lt;/b&gt;&lt;br&gt;
	access-list 102 permit tcp any 63.36.9.0 0.0.0.255  established&lt;/p&gt;

	&lt;h3&gt;ACL 101&lt;/h3&gt;
	&lt;p&gt;As you can see, ACL 101 says to permit traffic originating from any address on the 63.36.9.0 network.  The &#39;any&#39; 
	statement means that the traffic is allowed to have any destination address with the limitation of going to port 80 
	(which is the web port for HTTP).  This is still only half of the solution.  If you only use this access list you 
	have totally accomplished limiting your users from doing nothing more on the internet than just be able to browse from 
	website to website.  However, you have taken no action on the incoming &lt;span8969383&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;javascript:void(0);&quot; style=&quot;color: rgb(0, 15, 255); text-decoration: underline;&quot; id=&quot;Y8969383S7&quot;&gt;trafic&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/span8969383&gt;.  The Internet still has full access
	to all the IPs and all the ports.  This leaves you vulnerable.&lt;/p&gt;

	&lt;h3&gt;ACL 102&lt;/h3&gt;
	Since you only want your users to be able to browse the Internet, you must block all incoming traffic accept for
	the established connections in which the websites are replying to a computer on your network.
	Doing this is impossible unless you use the &#39;established&#39; command.

	&lt;p&gt;Now that we are familiar with the &#39;established&#39; command, ACL 102 simply states to permit established traffic from anywhere
	to all computers within our 63.36.9.0 network.&lt;/p&gt;

	&lt;p&gt;You may ask why access-list 102 does not read:&lt;/p&gt;

	&lt;p class=&quot;code&quot;&gt;access-list 102 permit tcp any any established&lt;/p&gt;

	&lt;p&gt;In this situation this works just as good, but because it is not as specific, it is considered a hole or an area of 
	vulnerability (especially if you ever got another block of IP addresses).&lt;/p&gt;

	&lt;h2&gt;Activating an Access Control List&lt;/h2&gt;
	&lt;p&gt;Now that you have created these ACLs they are useless until you declare them to be used in some way.  As of right
	now they are an inactive list doing nothing.  Our next article will cover
	&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.networkclue.com/routing/Cisco/access-lists/applying.aspx&quot;&gt;applying ACLs&lt;/a&gt; on 
	interfaces and how to specify if the ACL is for incoming or 
	outgoing traffic on that interface.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;We will apply our ACLs to the serial (T1) interface to protect our
network and to limit our user&#39;s Internet access to just web browsing.&lt;/p&gt;

	&lt;p&gt;Before
we do that, we need to add one more entry to access-list 101 to allow
HTTPS for web browsing. If you have a clue about TCP/IP you know that
web browsing (HTTP) is done on port 80 and that web browsing securely
(HTTPS) is done on port 443. So we also need to open port 443 if any
user is to be able to let&#39;s say place an online order or check their
bank account. Typically, the web page where you enter your personal
information should be secure and thus requires the use of HTTPS.&lt;/p&gt;

	&lt;p&gt;The line we add is very similar to the line that is already in access list 101. You probably already have it figured out by now:&lt;/p&gt;

	&lt;p class=&quot;code&quot;&gt;access-list 101 tcp permit 63.36.9.0 0.0.0.255 any eq 443&lt;/p&gt;

	&lt;p&gt;Now that our ACLs are complete, here is how we apply them to an interface.&lt;/p&gt;

	&lt;h2&gt;In or Out&lt;/h2&gt;
	&lt;p&gt;We
first must decide the traffic that we are filtering is going in or out.
Our users trying to access websites on the Internet is a good example
of traffic going OUT from our business. Receiving e-mails from the
Internet is a good example of traffic coming IN to our business. But
depending on the interface you want to apply the ACLs to, will
determine the direction of the traffic.&lt;/p&gt;

	&lt;p&gt;Take
for example a router with 2 interfaces. It has a serial port, ser0/0,
(AKA T-1 connection) and an ethernet port, eth0/0. The Internet traffic
coming IN to our office is going IN the ser0/0 interface, but is also
going OUT the eth0/0 interface to reach the office network. See how
that works?&lt;/p&gt;

	&lt;p&gt;Now you have all kinds of
options as to where you put your restrictions on your serial ports or
your ethernet ports and this is just with a simple example!&lt;/p&gt;

	&lt;p&gt;For now we will activate the access lists
on the serial port so the point of views (POV) are the same. Traffic
coming IN the office is also going IN the serial port and traffic going
OUT of the office is going OUT that same serial port.&lt;/p&gt;

	&lt;h2&gt;Applying Access Lists&lt;/h2&gt;
	&lt;p&gt;Finally the instructions you all have been waiting for!  Make sure you are in enabled mode.  Then use the command below:&lt;/p&gt;

	&lt;p class=&quot;code&quot;&gt;conf t&lt;br&gt;
	int ser0/0&lt;br&gt;
	access-group 101 out&lt;br&gt;
	access-group 102 in&lt;br&gt;&lt;/p&gt;

	&lt;p&gt;See how you must be in configuration mode of the interface to apply an access-list?  Remember that you can only apply ONE ACL 
	in each direction of an interface.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2&gt;Editing and adding ACLs&lt;/h2&gt;
	&lt;p&gt;If you need to add more permissions, you must add to the ACL you have already created.  Any lines you add 
	will be appended to at the bottom of the list.&lt;/p&gt;

	&lt;p&gt;How I keep track of all the ACLs I use is by keeping each one in a separate text &lt;span703556&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;javascript:void(0);&quot; style=&quot;color: rgb(0, 15, 255); text-decoration: underline;&quot; id=&quot;Y703556S4&quot;&gt;file&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/span703556&gt;.
I then make changes to the text file then I delete the whole
access-list from the router&#39;s memory (running-config) and then copy and
paste the new list each time I make updates.&lt;/p&gt;

	&lt;p class=&quot;clue&quot;&gt;Clue: There is no way to remove a single line from an ACL.  Instead it is better to copy 
	the whole ACL into a text &lt;span703556&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;javascript:void(0);&quot; style=&quot;color: rgb(0, 15, 255); text-decoration: underline;&quot; id=&quot;Y703556S8&quot;&gt;editor&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/span703556&gt; and remove the offending line. Then remove the whole ACL from the router&#39;s memory (see below) and then add the 
	modified ACL.&lt;/p&gt;

	&lt;h2&gt;Removing ACLs&lt;/h2&gt;
	&lt;p&gt;To remove an ACL from the router, be sure you are in enabled &lt;span703556&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;javascript:void(0);&quot; style=&quot;color: rgb(0, 15, 255); text-decoration: underline;&quot; id=&quot;Y703556S3&quot;&gt;mode&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/span703556&gt;.  
	Then use the command:&lt;/p&gt;

	&lt;p class=&quot;code&quot;&gt;no access-list &amp;lt;list number&amp;gt;&lt;/p&gt;
	&lt;p&gt;That is all there is to it.&lt;/p&gt;

	&lt;p class=&quot;clue&quot;&gt;Clue:
When you delete an access-list that is currently being applied to an
interface, all traffic that is to be filtered through the specified
access list will be allowed until the access list is reinstated or a
new access-list is specified in the access-group command. &lt;br&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 class=&quot;clue&quot;&gt;Advanced ACLs&#39;&lt;br&gt;&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;We will create an ACL that allows the users in our office to 
	access the internet using a range of common ports.  As you can see 
	in the example above, we have been just specifying individual 
	ports.&lt;/p&gt;
	
	&lt;h2&gt;Port Ranges&lt;/h2&gt;
	&lt;p&gt;In the example you see the letters &#39;eq&#39; before the port is 
	declared.  This is short for &#39;equal to&#39;.  Other ones include:
	&lt;/p&gt;&lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;b&gt;gt&lt;/b&gt; - Greater Than followed by the port number.&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;b&gt;lt&lt;/b&gt; - Less Than followed by the port number&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;b&gt;range&lt;/b&gt; - To specify an inclusive port range&lt;br&gt;after the keyword range put in the first port in the range followed
	by a space and then the last port in the range.&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;
	

	&lt;h2&gt;Commenting&lt;/h2&gt;
	&lt;p&gt;As
your access lists grow and become more complex it is a great idea to
add comments. Adding a comment is as simple as beginning the comment
line with an exclamation point.&lt;/p&gt;

	&lt;h2&gt;Filter Masks&lt;/h2&gt;
	&lt;p&gt;First be sure that you &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.networkclue.com/hardware/computer/binary.aspx&quot;&gt;brush up on your binary&lt;/a&gt; and read our article on &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.networkclue.com/routing/tcpip/index.aspx&quot;&gt;TCP/IP Addressing&lt;/a&gt; and &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.networkclue.com/routing/tcpip/calculating-masks.aspx&quot;&gt;Calculating Subnet 
	Masks&lt;/a&gt;.  You must first have a good grasp of the use of binary to calculate subnet &lt;span7842620&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;javascript:void(0);&quot; style=&quot;color: rgb(0, 15, 255); text-decoration: underline;&quot; id=&quot;Y7842620S3&quot;&gt;masks&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/span7842620&gt;.&lt;/p&gt;

	&lt;p&gt;Using &lt;span7842620&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;javascript:void(0);&quot; style=&quot;color: rgb(0, 15, 255); text-decoration: underline;&quot; id=&quot;Y7842620S6&quot;&gt;filter&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/span7842620&gt; masks allow you to group IP Addresses together instead of having to specify each IP address individually.  So for example, 
	if you were to have five &lt;span7842620&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;javascript:void(0);&quot; style=&quot;color: rgb(0, 15, 255); text-decoration: underline;&quot; id=&quot;Y7842620S7&quot;&gt;servers&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/span7842620&gt; and all their addresses were 10.10.10.1 - 10.10.10.5 it is easy to grant or deny access to all 5 with only 
	&lt;span7842620&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;javascript:void(0);&quot; style=&quot;color: rgb(0, 15, 255); text-decoration: underline;&quot; id=&quot;Y7842620S9&quot;&gt;one line&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/span7842620&gt; in the access list.  If you have the addresses scattered you either have to make 5 separate entries or change the IPs of the 
	servers.&lt;/p&gt;

	&lt;p&gt;The way you specify a group of IP addresses is very similar to how a subnet &lt;span7842620&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;javascript:void(0);&quot; style=&quot;color: rgb(0, 15, 255); text-decoration: underline;&quot; id=&quot;Y7842620S1&quot;&gt;mask&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/span7842620&gt; is used, except that the 1s and 0s are inversed.  For 
	example, all the &lt;span7842620&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;javascript:void(0);&quot; style=&quot;color: rgb(0, 15, 255); text-decoration: underline;&quot; id=&quot;Y7842620S0&quot;&gt;web servers&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/span7842620&gt;
on our sample network fall in the subnet of 10.10.10.1 - 10.10.10.15
(if this was a subnet mask it would be: 255.255.255.240). We would
never assign the servers this subnet mask because we want the
workstations (using addresses 10.10.10.65-10.10.10.254) to talk
directly to the servers. This prevents our router from being taxed. But
now that we know the equivalent subnet mask for this ip block of
servers, we can easily create the access-list filter mask, which is
0.0.0.15 As I mentioned earlier the filter mask is the opposite of the
subnet mask. Here is how it looks in binary:&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;    128 64 32 16|8 4 2 1&lt;br&gt;SM    1  1  1  1|0 0 0 0=240&lt;br&gt;FM    0  0  0  0|1 1 1 1=15&lt;br&gt;&lt;/pre&gt;

	&lt;p class=&quot;clue&quot;&gt;Clue: If you put the servers and workstations on 2 different network blocks the router will have an insane amount of 
	traffic to route. Definitely not a good idea.&lt;/p&gt;


	&lt;p&gt;With
filter masks you can almost easily guess the correct value as long as
the numbers in the filter mask are a power of 2 minus 1. IFor example,
I know that my web servers aregrouped in the first 15 IP addresses. The
smallest power of two that 15 can fit into is 16. Then subtract 1 and
my filter mask is 0.0.0.15&lt;/p&gt;

	&lt;h3&gt;Filter Masks in Access Lists&lt;/h3&gt;
	&lt;p&gt;So
if I wanted to permit all incoming web traffic requests to my web
servers (To prevent any Internet access to Rogue web servers on
employee&#39;s workstations). I would enter this line in the access list:&lt;/p&gt;

	&lt;p class=&quot;code&quot;&gt;
	!Permit HTTP port 80 traffic&lt;br&gt;
	access-list 102 permit tcp any 10.10.10.0 0.0.0.15 eq 80&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;

	!Permit HTTPS port 443 traffic&lt;br&gt;
	access-list 102 permit tcp any 10.10.10.0 0.0.0.15 eq 443
	&lt;/p&gt;

	&lt;h2&gt;Many, Many ACLs&lt;/h2&gt;
	&lt;p&gt;When
I last worked for an ISP we had several connections terminating into
one router. To make things as secure as possible I made 2 access lists
for each interface. One for incomming traffic and one for outgoing.
Keeping track of all this quickly became a nightmare. What I did to
help was to have a notepad text file for each access list. At the top
of each access list was the function of each access list, a description
of the lastest modifications, modification date and who made the
modification.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;--------------------------------&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Article taken from - www.networkclue.com&lt;br&gt;&lt;/p&gt;</description>
    
    <category domain="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog">Main Page</category>
    
    <category domain="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/CCNADocs">CCNA Docs</category>
    
    
    <ent:cloud ent:href="">
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="ACLs" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=ACLs">ACLs</ent:topic>
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="Security" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=Security">Security</ent:topic>
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="Firewall" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=Firewall">Firewall</ent:topic>
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="CCNA" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=CCNA">CCNA</ent:topic>
    
    </ent:cloud>
    
    
    
  </item>
  
  <item>
    <dc:creator>sparky</dc:creator>
    <title>Switch Port Analysising - SPAN</title>
    <link>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/7/1/4241699.html</link>
    <guid>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/7/1/4241699.html</guid>
    <pubDate>Wed, 01 Jul 2009 14:54:00 +0100</pubDate>
    <description>&lt;span class=&quot;content&quot;&gt;&lt;p&gt;Overview of SPAN&lt;br&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;What is SPAN and why is it needed? The SPAN feature was introduced on
	 switches because of a fundamental difference that switches have with hubs. When
	 a hub receives a packet on one port, the hub sends out a copy of that packet on
	 all ports except on the one where the hub received the packet. After a switch
	 boots, it starts to build up a Layer 2 forwarding table on the basis of the
	 source MAC address of the different packets that the switch receives. After
	 this forwarding table is built, the switch forwards traffic that is destined
	 for a MAC address directly to the corresponding port. &lt;/p&gt; 
  &lt;p&gt;For example, if you want to capture Ethernet traffic that is sent by
	 host A to host B, and both are connected to a hub, just attach a sniffer to
	 this hub. All other ports see the traffic between hosts A and B:
	 &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;
&lt;img alt=&quot;41a.gif&quot; src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/image/gif/paws/10570/41a.gif&quot; usemap=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot;&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
  
  &lt;p&gt;On a switch, after the host B MAC address is learned, unicast traffic
	 from A to B is only forwarded to the B port. Therefore, the sniffer does not
	 see this traffic:&lt;/p&gt; 
  &lt;p&gt;
&lt;img alt=&quot;41b.gif&quot; src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/image/gif/paws/10570/41b.gif&quot; usemap=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot;&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
  
  &lt;p&gt;In this configuration, the sniffer only captures traffic that is
	 flooded to all ports, such as:&lt;/p&gt; &lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt; 
	 &lt;p&gt;Broadcast traffic&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt; 
	 &lt;p&gt;Multicast traffic with CGMP or Internet Group Management Protocol
		(IGMP) snooping disabled&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt; 
	 &lt;p&gt;Unknown unicast traffic&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt; 
  &lt;p&gt;Unicast flooding occurs when the switch does not have the destination
	 MAC in its content-addressable memory (CAM) table. The switch does not know
	 where to send the traffic. The switch floods the packets to all the ports in
	 the destination VLAN. &lt;/p&gt; 
  &lt;p&gt;An extra feature is necessary that artificially copies unicast packets
	 that host A sends to the sniffer port: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;
&lt;img alt=&quot;41c.gif&quot; src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/image/gif/paws/10570/41c.gif&quot; usemap=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot;&gt;
&lt;/p&gt; 
  &lt;p&gt;In this diagram, the sniffer is attached to a port that is configured
	 to receive a copy of every packet that host A sends. This port is called a SPAN
	 port. The other sections of this document describe how you can tune this
	 feature very precisely in order to do more than just monitor a port. &lt;/p&gt; 
 
&lt;h3&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;terms&quot;&gt;SPAN Terminology&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt; 
	 &lt;p&gt;
&lt;b&gt;Ingress traffic&lt;/b&gt;—Traffic that enters the
		switch.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt; 
	 &lt;p&gt;
&lt;b&gt;Egress traffic&lt;/b&gt;—Traffic that leaves the
		switch.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt; 
	 &lt;p&gt;
&lt;b&gt;
&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/switches/ps708/products_tech_note09186a008015c612.shtml#charac_source&quot;&gt;Source (SPAN)
		port&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;/b&gt;—A port that is monitored with use of the SPAN
		feature.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt; 
	 &lt;p&gt;
&lt;b&gt;
&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/switches/ps708/products_tech_note09186a008015c612.shtml#charac_source_vlan&quot;&gt;Source (SPAN)
		VLAN&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;/b&gt;—A VLAN whose traffic is monitored with use of the SPAN
		feature.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt; 
	 &lt;p&gt;
&lt;b&gt;
&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/switches/ps708/products_tech_note09186a008015c612.shtml#charac_dest&quot;&gt;Destination (SPAN)
		port&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;/b&gt;—A port that monitors source ports, usually where a network
		analyzer is connected.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt; 
	 &lt;p&gt;
&lt;b&gt;
&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/switches/ps708/products_tech_note09186a008015c612.shtml#char_reflect&quot;&gt;Reflector
		Port&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;/b&gt;—A port that copies packets onto an RSPAN
		VLAN.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt; 
	 &lt;p&gt;
&lt;b&gt;Monitor port&lt;/b&gt;—A monitor port is also a destination
		SPAN port in Catalyst 2900XL/3500XL/2950
		terminology.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;p&gt;
&lt;img alt=&quot;41d.gif&quot; src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/image/gif/paws/10570/41d.gif&quot; usemap=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot;&gt;
&lt;/p&gt; 
  &lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt; 
	 &lt;p&gt;
&lt;b&gt;Local SPAN&lt;/b&gt;—The SPAN feature is local when the
		monitored ports are all located on the same switch as the destination port.
		This feature is in contrast to Remote SPAN (RSPAN), which this list also
		defines.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt; 
	 &lt;p&gt;
&lt;b&gt;Remote SPAN (RSPAN)&lt;/b&gt;—Some source ports are not
		located on the same switch as the destination port. RSPAN is an advanced
		feature that requires a special VLAN to carry the traffic that is monitored by
		SPAN between switches. RSPAN is not supported on all switches. Check the
		respective release notes or configuration guide to see if you can use RSPAN on
		the switch that you deploy.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt; 
	 &lt;p&gt;
&lt;b&gt;Port-based SPAN (PSPAN)&lt;/b&gt;—The user specifies one or
		several source ports on the switch and one destination port.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt; 
	 &lt;p&gt;
&lt;b&gt;VLAN-based SPAN (VSPAN)&lt;/b&gt;—On a particular switch, the
		user can choose to monitor all the ports that belong to a particular VLAN in a
		single command.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt; 
	 &lt;p&gt;
&lt;b&gt;ESPAN&lt;/b&gt;—This means enhanced SPAN version. This term
		has been used several times during the evolution of the SPAN in order to name
		additional features. Therefore, the term is not very clear. Use of this term is
		avoided in this document.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt; 
	 &lt;p&gt;
&lt;b&gt;Administrative source&lt;/b&gt;—A list of source ports or
		VLANs that have been configured to be monitored.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt; 
	 &lt;p&gt;
&lt;b&gt;Operational source&lt;/b&gt;—A list of ports that are
		effectively monitored. This list of ports can be different from the
		administrative source. For example, a port that is in shutdown mode can appear
		in the administrative source, but is not effectively
		monitored.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;&lt;br&gt;Further details available at - http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/switches/ps708/products_tech_note09186a008015c612.shtml&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;&lt;/span&gt;</description>
    
    <category domain="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog">Main Page</category>
    
    <category domain="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/GeneralNetworking">General Networking</category>
    
    
    <ent:cloud ent:href="">
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="Switcing" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=Switcing">Switcing</ent:topic>
    
    </ent:cloud>
    
    
    
  </item>
  
  <item>
    <dc:creator>sparky</dc:creator>
    <title>Frame Relay</title>
    <link>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/6/1/4206608.html</link>
    <guid>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/6/1/4206608.html</guid>
    <pubDate>Mon, 01 Jun 2009 08:30:00 +0100</pubDate>
    <description>&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&lt;span class=&quot;content&quot;&gt;&lt;h2 class=&quot;pCT_ChapTitle&quot;&gt;Frame Relay
&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;hr class=&quot;Chap1&quot;&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;Introduction&quot;&gt; &lt;/a&gt;

&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020552&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;h2 class=&quot;p_H_Head1&quot;&gt;
Introduction
&lt;/h2&gt;

&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020553&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020554&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;
&lt;span style=&quot;color: Black; font-style: italic; font-weight: normal;&quot;&gt;Frame Relay&lt;/span&gt;
is a high-performance WAN protocol that operates at the physical and
data link layers of the OSI reference model. Frame Relay originally was
designed for use across Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)
interfaces. Today, it is used over a variety of other network
interfaces as well. This chapter focuses on Frame Relay&#39;s
specifications and applications in the context of WAN services.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020555&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;Frame Relay is an example
of a packet-switched technology. Packet-switched networks enable end
stations to dynamically share the network medium and the available
bandwidth. The following two techniques are used in packet-switching
technology:
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020556&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu1_Bullet1&quot;&gt;
•&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; height=&quot;2&quot; width=&quot;19&quot;&gt;Variable-length packets
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020557&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu1_Bullet1&quot;&gt;
•&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; height=&quot;2&quot; width=&quot;19&quot;&gt;Statistical multiplexing
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020558&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;Variable-length packets
are used for more efficient and flexible data transfers. These packets
are switched between the various segments in the network until the
destination is reached. &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020559&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;
Statistical multiplexing techniques control network access in a
packet-switched network. The advantage of this technique is that it
accommodates more flexibility and more efficient use of bandwidth. Most
of today&#39;s popular LANs, such as Ethernet and Token Ring, are
packet-switched networks.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020560&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020561&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;Frame
Relay often is described as a streamlined version of X.25, offering
fewer of the robust capabilities, such as windowing and retransmission
of last data that are offered in X.25. This is because Frame Relay
typically operates over WAN facilities that offer more reliable
connection services and a higher degree of reliability than the
facilities available during the late 1970s and early 1980s that served
as the common platforms for X.25 WANs. As mentioned earlier, Frame
Relay is strictly a Layer 2 protocol suite, whereas X.25 provides
services at Layer 3 (the network layer) as well. This enables Frame
Relay to offer higher performance and greater transmission efficiency
than X.25, and makes Frame Relay suitable for current WAN applications,
such as LAN interconnection.
&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;a name=&quot;Frame_Relay_Standardization&quot;&gt; &lt;/a&gt;

&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020562&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;h3 class=&quot;p_H_Head2&quot;&gt;
Frame Relay Standardization
&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020564&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020563&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;Initial
proposals for the standardization of Frame Relay were presented to the
Consultative Committee on International Telephone and Telegraph (CCITT)
in 1984. Because of lack of interoperability and lack of complete
standardization, however, Frame Relay did not experience significant
deployment during the late 1980s.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020565&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020566&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020567&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020568&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;A
major development in Frame Relay&#39;s history occurred in 1990 when Cisco,
Digital Equipment Corporation (DEC), Northern Telecom, and StrataCom
formed a consortium to focus on Frame Relay technology development.
This consortium developed a specification that conformed to the basic
Frame Relay protocol that was being discussed in CCITT, but it extended
the protocol with features that provide additional capabilities for
complex internetworking environments. These Frame Relay extensions are
referred to collectively as the Local Management Interface (LMI). &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020569&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;
Since the consortium&#39;s specification was developed and published, many
vendors have announced their support of this extended Frame Relay
definition. ANSI and CCITT have subsequently standardized their own
variations of the original LMI specification, and these standardized
specifications now are more commonly used than the original version.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020570&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;Internationally, Frame
Relay was standardized by the International Telecommunication
Union—Telecommunications Standards Section (ITU-T). In the United
States, Frame Relay is an American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
standard.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;Frame_Relay_Devices&quot;&gt; &lt;/a&gt;

&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020571&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;h2 class=&quot;p_H_Head1&quot;&gt;
Frame Relay Devices
&lt;/h2&gt;

&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020572&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;
Devices attached to a Frame Relay WAN fall into the following two general categories: 
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020573&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu1_Bullet1&quot;&gt;
•&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; height=&quot;2&quot; width=&quot;19&quot;&gt;Data terminal equipment (DTE)
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020574&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu1_Bullet1&quot;&gt;
•&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; height=&quot;2&quot; width=&quot;19&quot;&gt;Data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE) 
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020576&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020575&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020577&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;DTEs
generally are considered to be terminating equipment for a specific
network and typically are located on the premises of a customer. In
fact, they may be owned by the customer. Examples of DTE devices are
terminals, personal computers, routers, and bridges. &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020578&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;
DCEs are carrier-owned internetworking devices. The purpose of DCE
equipment is to provide clocking and switching services in a network,
which are the devices that actually transmit data through the WAN. In
most cases, these are packet switches. Figure 10-1 shows the
relationship between the two categories of devices.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020582&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pTC_TableCap&quot;&gt;
Figure&amp;nbsp;10-1	DCEs Generally Reside Within Carrier-Operated WANs&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;div align=&quot;left&quot;&gt;&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/Other/cpress_ill/CT_-_Mar_2002/IT841001.jpg&quot; id=&quot;wp1020580&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; hspace=&quot;0&quot; vspace=&quot;0&quot;&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pTC_TableCap&quot;&gt;

&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020583&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020584&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020585&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020586&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;The
connection between a DTE device and a DCE device consists of both a
physical layer component and a link layer component. The physical
component defines the mechanical, electrical, functional, and
procedural specifications for the connection between the devices. One
of the most commonly used physical layer interface specifications is
the recommended standard (RS)-232 specification. The link layer
component defines the protocol that establishes the connection between
the DTE device, such as a router, and the DCE device, such as a switch.
This chapter examines a commonly utilized protocol specification used
in WAN networking: the Frame Relay protocol. &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;Frame_Relay_Virtual_Circuits&quot;&gt; &lt;/a&gt;

&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020587&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;h2 class=&quot;p_H_Head1&quot;&gt;
Frame Relay Virtual Circuits
&lt;/h2&gt;

&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020588&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020589&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;
Frame Relay provides connection-oriented data link layer communication.
This means that a defined communication exists between each pair of
devices and that these connections are associated with a connection
identifier. This service is implemented by using a Frame Relay virtual
circuit, which is a logical connection created between two data
terminal equipment (DTE) devices across a Frame Relay packet-switched
network (PSN).
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020590&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;Virtual circuits provide a
bidirectional communication path from one DTE device to another and are
uniquely identified by a data-link connection identifier (DLCI). A
number of virtual circuits can be multiplexed into a single physical
circuit for transmission across the network. This capability often can
reduce the equipment and network complexity required to connect
multiple DTE devices. &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020591&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;
A virtual circuit can pass through any number of intermediate DCE devices (switches) located within the Frame Relay PSN. 
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020592&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;
Frame Relay virtual circuits fall into two categories: switched virtual circuits (SVCs) and permanent virtual circuits (PVCs).
&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;a name=&quot;Switched_Virtual_Circuits&quot;&gt; &lt;/a&gt;

&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020593&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;h3 class=&quot;p_H_Head2&quot;&gt;
Switched Virtual Circuits
&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020595&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020594&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;
&lt;span style=&quot;color: Black; font-style: italic; font-weight: normal;&quot;&gt;Switched virtual circuits (SVCs)&lt;/span&gt;
are temporary connections used in situations requiring only sporadic
data transfer between DTE devices across the Frame Relay network. A
communication session across an SVC consists of the following four
operational states:
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020596&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu1_Bullet1&quot;&gt;
•&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; height=&quot;2&quot; width=&quot;19&quot;&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color: Black; font-style: normal; font-weight: bold;&quot;&gt;Call setup&lt;/span&gt;—The virtual circuit between two Frame Relay DTE devices is established.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020597&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu1_Bullet1&quot;&gt;
•&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; height=&quot;2&quot; width=&quot;19&quot;&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color: Black; font-style: normal; font-weight: bold;&quot;&gt;Data transfer&lt;/span&gt;—Data is transmitted between the DTE devices over the virtual circuit.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020598&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu1_Bullet1&quot;&gt;
•&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; height=&quot;2&quot; width=&quot;19&quot;&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color: Black; font-style: normal; font-weight: bold;&quot;&gt;Idle&lt;/span&gt;—The
connection between DTE devices is still active, but no data is
transferred. If an SVC remains in an idle state for a defined period of
time, the call can be terminated. &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020599&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu1_Bullet1&quot;&gt;
•&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; height=&quot;2&quot; width=&quot;19&quot;&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color: Black; font-style: normal; font-weight: bold;&quot;&gt;Call termination&lt;/span&gt;—The virtual circuit between DTE devices is terminated.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020600&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;
After the virtual circuit is terminated, the DTE devices must establish
a new SVC if there is additional data to be exchanged. It is expected
that SVCs will be established, maintained, and terminated using the
same signaling protocols used in ISDN. &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020601&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020602&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;
Few manufacturers of Frame Relay DCE equipment support switched virtual
circuit connections. Therefore, their actual deployment is minimal in
today&#39;s Frame Relay networks.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020603&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;Previously not widely
supported by Frame Relay equipment, SVCs are now the norm. Companies
have found that SVCs save money in the end because the circuit is not
open all the time.
&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;a name=&quot;Permanent_Virtual_Circuits&quot;&gt; &lt;/a&gt;

&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020604&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;h3 class=&quot;p_H_Head2&quot;&gt;
Permanent Virtual Circuits
&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020605&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020606&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020607&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;
&lt;span style=&quot;color: Black; font-style: italic; font-weight: normal;&quot;&gt;Permanent virtual circuits (PVCs)&lt;/span&gt;
are permanently established connections that are used for frequent and
consistent data transfers between DTE devices across the Frame Relay
network. Communication across a PVC does not require the call setup and
termination states that are used with SVCs. PVCs always operate in one
of the following two operational states:
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020608&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu1_Bullet1&quot;&gt;
•&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; height=&quot;2&quot; width=&quot;19&quot;&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color: Black; font-style: normal; font-weight: bold;&quot;&gt;Data transfer&lt;/span&gt;—Data is transmitted between the DTE devices over the virtual circuit.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020609&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu1_Bullet1&quot;&gt;
•&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; height=&quot;2&quot; width=&quot;19&quot;&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color: Black; font-style: normal; font-weight: bold;&quot;&gt;Idle&lt;/span&gt;—The
connection between DTE devices is active, but no data is transferred.
Unlike SVCs, PVCs will not be terminated under any circumstances when
in an idle state.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020610&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;
DTE devices can begin transferring data whenever they are ready because the circuit is permanently established.
&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;a name=&quot;Data-Link_Connection_Identifier&quot;&gt; &lt;/a&gt;

&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020611&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;h3 class=&quot;p_H_Head2&quot;&gt;
Data-Link Connection Identifier
&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020612&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020613&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;
Frame Relay virtual circuits are identified by &lt;span style=&quot;color: Black; font-style: italic; font-weight: normal;&quot;&gt;data-link connection identifiers (DLCIs)&lt;/span&gt;. DLCI values typically are assigned by the Frame Relay service provider (for example, the telephone company). 
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020614&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;Frame Relay DLCIs have
local significance, which means that their values are unique in the
LAN, but not necessarily in the Frame Relay WAN. &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020615&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;
Figure 10-2 illustrates how two different DTE devices can be assigned the same DLCI value within one Frame Relay WAN.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020619&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pTC_TableCap&quot;&gt;
Figure&amp;nbsp;10-2	A Single Frame Relay Virtual Circuit Can Be Assigned Different DLCIs on Each End of a VC&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;div align=&quot;left&quot;&gt;&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/Other/cpress_ill/CT_-_Mar_2002/IT841002.jpg&quot; id=&quot;wp1020617&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; hspace=&quot;0&quot; vspace=&quot;0&quot;&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pTC_TableCap&quot;&gt;

&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;Congestion-Control_Mechanisms&quot;&gt; &lt;/a&gt;

&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020620&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;h2 class=&quot;p_H_Head1&quot;&gt;
Congestion-Control Mechanisms
&lt;/h2&gt;

&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020622&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020621&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;
Frame Relay reduces network overhead by implementing simple
congestion-notification mechanisms rather than explicit,
per-virtual-circuit flow control. Frame Relay typically is implemented
on reliable network media, so data integrity is not sacrificed because
flow control can be left to higher-layer protocols. Frame Relay
implements two congestion-notification mechanisms:
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020623&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu1_Bullet1&quot;&gt;
•&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; height=&quot;2&quot; width=&quot;19&quot;&gt;Forward-explicit congestion notification (FECN)
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020624&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu1_Bullet1&quot;&gt;
•&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; height=&quot;2&quot; width=&quot;19&quot;&gt;Backward-explicit congestion notification (BECN)
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020625&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020626&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020627&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;FECN
and BECN each is controlled by a single bit contained in the Frame
Relay frame header. The Frame Relay frame header also contains a
Discard Eligibility (DE) bit, which is used to identify less important
traffic that can be dropped during periods of congestion.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020628&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020629&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;
The &lt;span style=&quot;color: Black; font-style: italic; font-weight: normal;&quot;&gt;FECN bit&lt;/span&gt;
is part of the Address field in the Frame Relay frame header. The FECN
mechanism is initiated when a DTE device sends Frame Relay frames into
the network. If the network is congested, DCE devices (switches) set
the value of the frames&#39; FECN bit to 1. When the frames reach the
destination DTE device, the Address field (with the FECN bit set)
indicates that the frame experienced congestion in the path from source
to destination. The DTE device can relay this information to a
higher-layer protocol for processing. Depending on the implementation,
flow control may be initiated, or the indication may be ignored.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020630&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020631&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;
The &lt;span style=&quot;color: Black; font-style: italic; font-weight: normal;&quot;&gt;BECN bit&lt;/span&gt;
is part of the Address field in the Frame Relay frame header. DCE
devices set the value of the BECN bit to 1 in frames traveling in the
opposite direction of frames with their FECN bit set. This informs the
receiving DTE device that a particular path through the network is
congested. The DTE device then can relay this information to a
higher-layer protocol for processing. Depending on the implementation,
flow-control may be initiated, or the indication may be ignored.
&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;a name=&quot;Frame_Relay_Discard_Eligibility&quot;&gt; &lt;/a&gt;

&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020632&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;h3 class=&quot;p_H_Head2&quot;&gt;
Frame Relay Discard Eligibility
&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020633&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020634&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;
The &lt;span style=&quot;color: Black; font-style: italic; font-weight: normal;&quot;&gt;Discard Eligibility (DE) bit&lt;/span&gt;
is used to indicate that a frame has lower importance than other
frames. The DE bit is part of the Address field in the Frame Relay
frame header.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020635&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020636&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;DTE
devices can set the value of the DE bit of a frame to 1 to indicate
that the frame has lower importance than other frames. When the network
becomes congested, DCE devices will discard frames with the DE bit set
before discarding those that do not. This reduces the likelihood of
critical data being dropped by Frame Relay DCE devices during periods
of congestion.
&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;a name=&quot;Frame_Relay_Error_Checking&quot;&gt; &lt;/a&gt;

&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020637&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;h3 class=&quot;p_H_Head2&quot;&gt;
Frame Relay Error Checking
&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020638&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020639&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;
Frame Relay uses a common error-checking mechanism known as the &lt;span style=&quot;color: Black; font-style: italic; font-weight: normal;&quot;&gt;cyclic redundancy check (CRC)&lt;/span&gt;.
The CRC compares two calculated values to determine whether errors
occurred during the transmission from source to destination. Frame
Relay reduces network overhead by implementing error checking rather
than error correction. Frame Relay typically is implemented on reliable
network media, so data integrity is not sacrificed because error
correction can be left to higher-layer protocols running on top of
Frame Relay.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;Frame_Relay_Local_Management_Interface&quot;&gt; &lt;/a&gt;

&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020640&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;h2 class=&quot;p_H_Head1&quot;&gt;
Frame Relay Local Management Interface
&lt;/h2&gt;

&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020642&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020641&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;
The &lt;span style=&quot;color: Black; font-style: italic; font-weight: normal;&quot;&gt;Local Management Interface (LMI)&lt;/span&gt;
is a set of enhancements to the basic Frame Relay specification. The
LMI was developed in 1990 by Cisco Systems, StrataCom, Northern
Telecom, and Digital Equipment Corporation. It offers a number of
features (called extensions) for managing complex internetworks. Key
Frame Relay LMI extensions include global addressing, virtual circuit
status messages, and multicasting.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020643&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;The LMI global addressing
extension gives Frame Relay data-link connection identifier (DLCI)
values global rather than local significance. DLCI values become DTE
addresses that are unique in the Frame Relay WAN. The global addressing
extension adds functionality and manageability to Frame Relay
internetworks. Individual network interfaces and the end nodes attached
to them, for example, can be identified by using standard
address-resolution and discovery techniques. In addition, the entire
Frame Relay network appears to be a typical LAN to routers on its
periphery.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020644&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020645&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;LMI
virtual circuit status messages provide communication and
synchronization between Frame Relay DTE and DCE devices. These messages
are used to periodically report on the status of PVCs, which prevents
data from being sent into black holes (that is, over PVCs that no
longer exist).
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020647&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020646&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;The
LMI multicasting extension allows multicast groups to be assigned.
Multicasting saves bandwidth by allowing routing updates and
address-resolution messages to be sent only to specific groups of
routers. The extension also transmits reports on the status of
multicast groups in update messages.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;Frame_Relay_Network_Implementation&quot;&gt; &lt;/a&gt;

&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020648&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;h2 class=&quot;p_H_Head1&quot;&gt;
Frame Relay Network Implementation
&lt;/h2&gt;

&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020650&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020649&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;A
common private Frame Relay network implementation is to equip a T1
multiplexer with both Frame Relay and non-Frame Relay interfaces. Frame
Relay traffic is forwarded out the Frame Relay interface and onto the
data network. Non-Frame Relay traffic is forwarded to the appropriate
application or service, such as a private branch exchange (PBX) for
telephone service or to a video-teleconferencing application.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020651&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020652&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;A
typical Frame Relay network consists of a number of DTE devices, such
as routers, connected to remote ports on multiplexer equipment via
traditional point-to-point services such as T1, fractional T1, or 56-Kb
circuits. An example of a simple Frame Relay network is shown in Figure
10-3.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020656&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pTC_TableCap&quot;&gt;
Figure&amp;nbsp;10-3	A Simple Frame Relay Network Connects Various Devices to Different Services over a WAN																					&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;div align=&quot;left&quot;&gt;&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/Other/cpress_ill/CT_-_Mar_2002/IT841003.jpg&quot; id=&quot;wp1020654&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; hspace=&quot;0&quot; vspace=&quot;0&quot;&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pTC_TableCap&quot;&gt;

&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020657&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020658&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;The
majority of Frame Relay networks deployed today are provisioned by
service providers that intend to offer transmission services to
customers. This is often referred to as a public Frame Relay service.
Frame Relay is implemented in both public carrier-provided networks and
in private enterprise networks. The following section examines the two
methodologies for deploying Frame Relay.
&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;a name=&quot;Public_Carrier-Provided_Networks&quot;&gt; &lt;/a&gt;

&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020659&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;h3 class=&quot;p_H_Head2&quot;&gt;
Public Carrier-Provided Networks
&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020661&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020660&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020662&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;In
public carrier-provided Frame Relay networks, the Frame Relay switching
equipment is located in the central offices of a telecommunications
carrier. Subscribers are charged based on their network use but are
relieved from administering and maintaining the Frame Relay network
equipment and service.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020663&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;
Generally, the DCE equipment also is owned by the telecommunications provider. &lt;br&gt;DTE
equipment either will be customer-owned or perhaps will be owned by the
telecommunications provider as a service to the customer.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020664&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;
The majority of today&#39;s Frame Relay networks are public carrier-provided networks.
&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;a name=&quot;Private_Enterprise_Networks&quot;&gt; &lt;/a&gt;

&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020665&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;h3 class=&quot;p_H_Head2&quot;&gt;
Private Enterprise Networks
&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020667&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020666&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020668&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;More
frequently, organizations worldwide are deploying private Frame Relay
networks. In private Frame Relay networks, the administration and
maintenance of the network are the responsibilities of the enterprise
(a private company). All the equipment, including the switching
equipment, is owned by the customer. &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;Frame_Relay_Frame_Formats&quot;&gt; &lt;/a&gt;

&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020669&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;h2 class=&quot;p_H_Head1&quot;&gt;
Frame Relay Frame Formats
&lt;/h2&gt;

&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020670&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;
To understand much of the functionality of Frame Relay, it is helpful
to understand the structure of the Frame Relay frame. Figure 10-4
depicts the basic format of the Frame Relay frame, and Figure 10-5
illustrates the LMI version of the Frame Relay frame.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020671&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020672&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020673&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;
Flags indicate the beginning and end of the frame. Three primary components make up &lt;br&gt;the
Frame Relay frame: the header and address area, the user-data portion,
and the frame check sequence (FCS). The address area, which is 2 bytes
in length, is comprised of 10 &lt;br&gt;bits representing the actual circuit
identifier and 6 bits of fields related to congestion management. This
identifier commonly is referred to as the data-link connection
identifier (DLCI). Each of these is discussed in the descriptions that
follow.
&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;a name=&quot;Standard_Frame_Relay_Frame&quot;&gt; &lt;/a&gt;

&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020674&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;h3 class=&quot;p_H_Head2&quot;&gt;
Standard Frame Relay Frame
&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020676&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020675&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;
Standard Frame Relay frames consist of the fields illustrated in Figure 10-4.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020680&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pTC_TableCap&quot;&gt;
Figure&amp;nbsp;10-4	Five Fields Comprise the Frame Relay Frame												&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;div align=&quot;left&quot;&gt;&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/Other/cpress_ill/CT_-_Mar_2002/IT841004.jpg&quot; id=&quot;wp1020678&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; hspace=&quot;0&quot; vspace=&quot;0&quot;&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pTC_TableCap&quot;&gt;

&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020681&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;
The following descriptions summarize the basic Frame Relay frame fields illustrated in Figure 10-4.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020682&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu1_Bullet1&quot;&gt;
•&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; height=&quot;2&quot; width=&quot;19&quot;&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color: Black; font-style: normal; font-weight: bold;&quot;&gt;Flags&lt;/span&gt;—Delimits
the beginning and end of the frame. The value of this field is always
the same and is represented either as the hexadecimal number 7E or as
the binary number 01111110.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020683&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu1_Bullet1&quot;&gt;
•&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; height=&quot;2&quot; width=&quot;19&quot;&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color: Black; font-style: normal; font-weight: bold;&quot;&gt;Address&lt;/span&gt;—Contains the following information:
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020684&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020685&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu2_Bullet2&quot;&gt;
–&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; height=&quot;2&quot; width=&quot;17&quot;&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color: Black; font-style: normal; font-weight: bold;&quot;&gt;DLCI&lt;/span&gt;—The
10-bit DLCI is the essence of the Frame Relay header. This value
represents the virtual connection between the DTE device and the
switch. Each virtual connection that is multiplexed onto the physical
channel will be represented by a unique DLCI. The DLCI values have
local significance only, which means that they are unique only to the
physical channel on which they reside. Therefore, devices at opposite
ends of a connection can use different DLCI values to refer to the same
virtual connection.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020686&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu2_Bullet2&quot;&gt;
–&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; height=&quot;2&quot; width=&quot;17&quot;&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color: Black; font-style: normal; font-weight: bold;&quot;&gt;Extended Address (EA)&lt;/span&gt;—The
EA is used to indicate whether the byte in which the EA value is 1 is
the last addressing field. If the value is 1, then the current byte is
determined to be the last DLCI octet. Although current Frame Relay
implementations all use a two-octet DLCI, this capability does allow
longer DLCIs to be used in the future. The eighth bit of each byte of
the Address field is used to indicate the EA.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020687&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020688&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu2_Bullet2&quot;&gt;
–&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; height=&quot;2&quot; width=&quot;17&quot;&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color: Black; font-style: normal; font-weight: bold;&quot;&gt;C/R&lt;/span&gt;—The C/R is the bit that follows the most significant DLCI byte in the Address field. The C/R bit is not currently defined.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020689&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020690&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu2_Bullet2&quot;&gt;
–&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; height=&quot;2&quot; width=&quot;17&quot;&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color: Black; font-style: normal; font-weight: bold;&quot;&gt;Congestion Control&lt;/span&gt;—This
consists of the 3 bits that control the Frame Relay
congestion-notification mechanisms. These are the FECN, BECN, and DE
bits, which are the last 3 bits in the Address field.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020692&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020691&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB3_Body3&quot;&gt;
&lt;span style=&quot;color: Black; font-style: italic; font-weight: normal;&quot;&gt;Forward-explicit congestion notification (FECN)&lt;/span&gt;
is a single-bit field that can be set to a value of 1 by a switch to
indicate to an end DTE device, such as a router, that congestion was
experienced in the direction of the frame transmission from source to
destination. The primary benefit of the use of the FECN and BECN fields
is the capability of higher-layer protocols to react intelligently to
these congestion indicators. Today, DECnet and OSI are the only
higher-layer protocols that implement these capabilities.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020694&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020693&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020695&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB3_Body3&quot;&gt;
&lt;span style=&quot;color: Black; font-style: italic; font-weight: normal;&quot;&gt;Backward-explicit congestion notification (BECN)&lt;/span&gt;
is a single-bit field that, when set to a value of 1 by a switch,
indicates that congestion was experienced in the network in the
direction opposite of the frame transmission from source to
destination.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020697&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020696&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB3_Body3&quot;&gt;Discard
eligibility (DE) is set by the DTE device, such as a router, to
indicate that the marked frame is of lesser importance relative to
other frames being transmitted. Frames that are marked as &quot;discard
eligible&quot; should be discarded before other frames in a congested
network. This allows for a basic prioritization mechanism in Frame
Relay networks.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020698&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu1_Bullet1&quot;&gt;
•&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; height=&quot;2&quot; width=&quot;19&quot;&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color: Black; font-style: normal; font-weight: bold;&quot;&gt;Data&lt;/span&gt;—Contains
encapsulated upper-layer data. Each frame in this variable-length field
includes a user data or payload field that will vary in length up to
16,000 octets. This field serves to transport the higher-layer protocol
packet (PDU) through a Frame Relay network.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020699&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu1_Bullet1&quot;&gt;
•&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; height=&quot;2&quot; width=&quot;19&quot;&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color: Black; font-style: normal; font-weight: bold;&quot;&gt;Frame Check Sequence&lt;/span&gt;—Ensures
the integrity of transmitted data. This value is computed by the source
device and verified by the receiver to ensure integrity of
transmission.
&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;a name=&quot;LMI_Frame_Format&quot;&gt; &lt;/a&gt;

&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020700&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;h3 class=&quot;p_H_Head2&quot;&gt;
LMI Frame Format
&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020702&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020701&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;
Frame Relay frames that conform to the LMI specifications consist of the fields illustrated in Figure 10-5. 
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020707&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pTC_TableCap&quot;&gt;
Figure&amp;nbsp;10-5	Nine Fields Comprise the Frame Relay That Conforms to the LMI Format&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;div align=&quot;left&quot;&gt;&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/internetworking/technology/handbook/Frame-Relay_files/Frame-Relay-5.jpg&quot; id=&quot;wp1020704&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; height=&quot;132&quot; hspace=&quot;0&quot; vspace=&quot;0&quot; width=&quot;557&quot;&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pTC_TableCap&quot;&gt;

&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020708&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;
The following descriptions summarize the fields illustrated in Figure 10-5.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020710&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020709&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu1_Bullet1&quot;&gt;
•&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; height=&quot;2&quot; width=&quot;19&quot;&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color: Black; font-style: normal; font-weight: bold;&quot;&gt;Flag&lt;/span&gt;—Delimits the beginning and end of the frame.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020712&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020711&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu1_Bullet1&quot;&gt;
•&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; height=&quot;2&quot; width=&quot;19&quot;&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color: Black; font-style: normal; font-weight: bold;&quot;&gt;LMI DLCI&lt;/span&gt;—Identifies
the frame as an LMI frame instead of a basic Frame Relay frame. The
LMI-specific DLCI value defined in the LMI consortium specification is
DLCI = 1023.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020714&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020713&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu1_Bullet1&quot;&gt;
•&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; height=&quot;2&quot; width=&quot;19&quot;&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color: Black; font-style: normal; font-weight: bold;&quot;&gt;Unnumbered Information Indicator&lt;/span&gt;—Sets the poll/final bit to zero.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020716&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020715&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu1_Bullet1&quot;&gt;
•&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; height=&quot;2&quot; width=&quot;19&quot;&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color: Black; font-style: normal; font-weight: bold;&quot;&gt;Protocol Discriminator&lt;/span&gt;—Always contains a value indicating that the frame is an LMI frame.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020718&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020717&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu1_Bullet1&quot;&gt;
•&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; height=&quot;2&quot; width=&quot;19&quot;&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color: Black; font-style: normal; font-weight: bold;&quot;&gt;Call Reference&lt;/span&gt;—Always contains zeros. This field currently is not used for any purpose.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020720&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020719&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu1_Bullet1&quot;&gt;
•&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; height=&quot;2&quot; width=&quot;19&quot;&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color: Black; font-style: normal; font-weight: bold;&quot;&gt;Message Typ&lt;/span&gt;e—Labels the frame as one of the following message types:
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020722&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020721&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu2_Bullet2&quot;&gt;
–&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; height=&quot;2&quot; width=&quot;17&quot;&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color: Black; font-style: normal; font-weight: bold;&quot;&gt;Status-inquiry message&lt;/span&gt;—Allows a user device to inquire about the status of the network.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020724&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020723&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020725&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu2_Bullet2&quot;&gt;
–&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; height=&quot;2&quot; width=&quot;17&quot;&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color: Black; font-style: normal; font-weight: bold;&quot;&gt;Status message&lt;/span&gt;—Responds to status-inquiry messages. Status messages include keepalives and PVC status messages.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020726&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020727&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu1_Bullet1&quot;&gt;
•&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; height=&quot;2&quot; width=&quot;19&quot;&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color: Black; font-style: normal; font-weight: bold;&quot;&gt;Information Elements&lt;/span&gt;—Contains a variable number of individual information elements (IEs). IEs consist of the following fields:
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020728&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu2_Bullet2&quot;&gt;
–&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; height=&quot;2&quot; width=&quot;17&quot;&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color: Black; font-style: normal; font-weight: bold;&quot;&gt;IE Identifier&lt;/span&gt;—Uniquely identifies the IE.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020729&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu2_Bullet2&quot;&gt;
–&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; height=&quot;2&quot; width=&quot;17&quot;&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color: Black; font-style: normal; font-weight: bold;&quot;&gt;IE Length&lt;/span&gt;—Indicates the length of the IE.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020730&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu2_Bullet2&quot;&gt;
–&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; height=&quot;2&quot; width=&quot;17&quot;&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color: Black; font-style: normal; font-weight: bold;&quot;&gt;Data&lt;/span&gt;—Consists of 1 or more bytes containing encapsulated upper-layer data.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020733&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020731&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020732&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu1_Bullet1&quot;&gt;
•&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; height=&quot;2&quot; width=&quot;19&quot;&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color: Black; font-style: normal; font-weight: bold;&quot;&gt;Frame Check Sequence (FCS)&lt;/span&gt;—Ensures the integrity of transmitted data.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;Summary&quot;&gt; &lt;/a&gt;

&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020734&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;h2 class=&quot;p_H_Head1&quot;&gt;
Summary
&lt;/h2&gt;

&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020735&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;Frame Relay is a
networking protocol that works at the bottom two levels of the OSI
reference model: the physical and data link layers. It is an example of
packet-switching technology, which enables end stations to dynamically
share network resources.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020736&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;
Frame Relay devices fall into the following two general categories:
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020737&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu1_Bullet1&quot;&gt;
•&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; height=&quot;2&quot; width=&quot;19&quot;&gt;Data terminal equipment (DTEs), which include terminals, personal computers, routers, and bridges 
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020738&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu1_Bullet1&quot;&gt;
•&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; height=&quot;2&quot; width=&quot;19&quot;&gt;Data
circuit-terminating equipment (DCEs), which transmit the data through
the network and are often carrier-owned devices (although,
increasingly, enterprises are buying their own DCEs and implementing
them in their networks)
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020739&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;
Frame Relay networks transfer data using one of the following two connection types:
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020740&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu1_Bullet1&quot;&gt;
•&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; height=&quot;2&quot; width=&quot;19&quot;&gt;Switched
virtual circuits (SVCs), which are temporary connections that are
created for each data transfer and then are terminated when the data
transfer is complete (not a widely used connection)
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020741&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu1_Bullet1&quot;&gt;
•&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; height=&quot;2&quot; width=&quot;19&quot;&gt;Permanent virtual circuits (PVCs), which are permanent connections
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020742&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;The DLCI is a value
assigned to each virtual circuit and DTE device connection point in the
Frame Relay WAN. Two different connections can be assigned the same
value within the same Frame Relay WAN—one on each side of the virtual
connection.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020743&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;In 1990, Cisco Systems,
StrataCom, Northern Telecom, and Digital Equipment Corporation
developed a set of Frame Relay enhancements called the Local Management
Interface (LMI). The LMI enhancements offer a number of features
(referred to as extensions) for managing complex internetworks,
including the following:
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020744&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu1_Bullet1&quot;&gt;
•&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; height=&quot;2&quot; width=&quot;19&quot;&gt;Global addressing
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020745&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu1_Bullet1&quot;&gt;
•&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; height=&quot;2&quot; width=&quot;19&quot;&gt;Virtual circuit status messages
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020746&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu1_Bullet1&quot;&gt;
•&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; height=&quot;2&quot; width=&quot;19&quot;&gt;Multicasting
&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/font&gt;</description>
    
    <category domain="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/CCNADocs">CCNA Docs</category>
    
    
    <ent:cloud ent:href="">
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="FrameRelay" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=FrameRelay">FrameRelay</ent:topic>
    
    </ent:cloud>
    
    
    
  </item>
  
  <item>
    <dc:creator>sparky</dc:creator>
    <title>Using the Capture command on a PIX firewall</title>
    <link>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/5/26/4200291.html</link>
    <guid>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/5/26/4200291.html</guid>
    <pubDate>Tue, 26 May 2009 10:47:00 +0100</pubDate>
    <description>&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;contentcolumn&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;font-weight: bold; text-decoration: underline;&quot;&gt;Using the Capture command on a PIX firewall&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;contentcolumn&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;A vital tool to use when troubleshooting
computer networking problems&amp;nbsp;and monitoring&amp;nbsp;computer networks&amp;nbsp;is a
packet sniffer.&amp;nbsp;That being said, one&amp;nbsp;of the best methods&amp;nbsp;to use
when&amp;nbsp;troubleshooting connection problems or monitoring suspicious
network activity in a Cisco Systems PIX firewall is by using the
capture command. Many times Cisco TAC will request captures from a PIX
in PCAP format for open problem tickets associated with unusual
problems or activity associated with the PIX and the network. &lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; class=&quot;contentcolumn&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;The
capture command was first&amp;nbsp;introduced to the PIX OS in version 6.2 and
has the ability to capture all data that passes through the PIX device.
You can use access-lists to specify the type of traffic that you wish
to capture, along with the source and destination addresses and ports.
Multiple capture statements can be used to attach the capture command
to multiple interfaces. You can even copy the raw header and
hexadecimal data in PCAP format to a tftp server and open it with
TCPDUMP or Ethereal. &lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;ul style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;div class=&quot;contentcolumn&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&lt;strong&gt;NOTE:&lt;/strong&gt; You must be in privileged mode to invoke the capture command.&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;

&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&lt;strong&gt;&lt;u&gt;Below is the command usage and syntax description per Cisco&#39;s PIX OS 7.0 documentation:&lt;/u&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;To
enable packet capture capabilities for packet sniffing and network
fault isolation, use the capture command. To disable packet capture
capabilities, use the no form of this command (see the &quot;Usage
Guidelines&quot; section for additional information about the no form of
this command). &lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&lt;strong&gt;capture &lt;/strong&gt;capture_name [&lt;strong&gt;access-li&lt;/strong&gt;st access_list_name] [&lt;strong&gt;buffer&lt;/strong&gt; buf_size] [&lt;strong&gt;ethernet-type&lt;/strong&gt; type] [&lt;strong&gt;interface &lt;/strong&gt;interface_name] [&lt;strong&gt;packet-length&lt;/strong&gt; bytes] [&lt;strong&gt;circular-buffer&lt;/strong&gt;] &lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&lt;strong&gt;capture&lt;/strong&gt; capture_name &lt;strong&gt;type asp-drop&lt;/strong&gt; [drop-code] [&lt;strong&gt;buffer&lt;/strong&gt; buf_size] [&lt;strong&gt;circular-buffer&lt;/strong&gt;] [&lt;strong&gt;packet-length&lt;/strong&gt; bytes] &lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&lt;strong&gt;capture&lt;/strong&gt; capture_name &lt;strong&gt;type isakmp&lt;/strong&gt; [&lt;strong&gt;access-list&lt;/strong&gt; access_list_name] [&lt;strong&gt;buffer&lt;/strong&gt; buf_size] [&lt;strong&gt;circular-buffer&lt;/strong&gt;] [&lt;strong&gt;interface&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;strong&gt;packet-length&lt;/strong&gt; bytes]  interface_name] [&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&lt;strong&gt;capture &lt;/strong&gt;capture_name &lt;strong&gt;type raw-data&lt;/strong&gt; [&lt;strong&gt;access-list&lt;/strong&gt; access_list_name] [&lt;strong&gt;buffer&lt;/strong&gt; buf_size] [&lt;strong&gt;circular-buffer&lt;/strong&gt;] [&lt;strong&gt;ethernet-type&lt;/strong&gt; type] [&lt;strong&gt;interface&lt;/strong&gt; interface_name] [&lt;strong&gt;packet-length&lt;/strong&gt; bytes] &lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&lt;strong&gt;capture&lt;/strong&gt; capture_name &lt;strong&gt;type webvpn user&lt;/strong&gt; webvpn-user [&lt;strong&gt;url&lt;/strong&gt; url] &lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&lt;strong&gt;no capture&lt;/strong&gt; capture_name &lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;strong&gt;&lt;u&gt;Syntax Description:&lt;/u&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;table style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; border=&quot;1&quot; bordercolor=&quot;#808080&quot; cellpadding=&quot;3&quot; cellspacing=&quot;1&quot; width=&quot;499&quot;&gt;&lt;tbody&gt;&lt;tr&gt;&lt;td style=&quot;width: 16%;&quot; valign=&quot;middle&quot;&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&lt;strong&gt;access-list access_list_name&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt; &lt;/p&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;td style=&quot;width: 84%;&quot; valign=&quot;middle&quot;&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;(Optional) Selects packets based on IP or higher fields for a specific access list identification. &lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;tr&gt;&lt;td style=&quot;width: 16%;&quot; valign=&quot;middle&quot;&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&lt;strong&gt;buffer buf_size&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt; &lt;/p&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;td style=&quot;width: 84%;&quot; valign=&quot;middle&quot;&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;(Optional) Defines the buffer size used to store the packet in bytes. &lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;tr&gt;&lt;td style=&quot;width: 16%;&quot; valign=&quot;middle&quot;&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&lt;strong&gt;capture_name&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt; &lt;/p&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;td style=&quot;width: 84%;&quot; valign=&quot;middle&quot;&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;Specifies the name of the packet capture. &lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;tr&gt;&lt;td style=&quot;width: 16%;&quot; valign=&quot;middle&quot;&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&lt;strong&gt;circular-buffer&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt; &lt;/p&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;td style=&quot;width: 84%;&quot; valign=&quot;middle&quot;&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;(Optional) Overwrites the buffer, starting from the beginning, when the buffer is full. &lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;tr&gt;&lt;td style=&quot;width: 16%;&quot; valign=&quot;middle&quot;&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&lt;strong&gt;ethernet-type type&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt; &lt;/p&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;td style=&quot;width: 84%;&quot; valign=&quot;middle&quot;&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;(Optional) Selects an Ethernet type to capture. &lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;tr&gt;&lt;td style=&quot;width: 16%;&quot; valign=&quot;middle&quot;&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&lt;strong&gt;interface interface_name&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt; &lt;/p&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;td style=&quot;width: 84%;&quot; valign=&quot;middle&quot;&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;(Optional)
Specifies the interface on which to use packet capture, where
interface_name is the name assigned to the interface by the nameif
command. &lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;tr&gt;&lt;td style=&quot;width: 16%;&quot; valign=&quot;middle&quot;&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&lt;strong&gt;packet-length bytes&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt; &lt;/p&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;td style=&quot;width: 84%;&quot; valign=&quot;middle&quot;&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;(Optional) Sets the maximum number of bytes of each packet to store in the capture buffer. &lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;tr&gt;&lt;td style=&quot;width: 16%;&quot; valign=&quot;middle&quot;&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&lt;strong&gt;type asp-drop drop-code&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt; &lt;/p&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;td style=&quot;width: 84%;&quot; valign=&quot;middle&quot;&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;(Optional)
Captures packets dropped for a reason. You can specify a particular
reason by using the drop-code argument. Valid values for the drop-code
argument are listed in the &quot;Usage Guidelines&quot; section, below. &lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;tr&gt;&lt;td style=&quot;width: 16%;&quot; valign=&quot;middle&quot;&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&lt;strong&gt;type isakamp&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt; &lt;/p&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;td style=&quot;width: 84%;&quot; valign=&quot;middle&quot;&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;(Optional) Captures encrypted and decrypted ISAKMP payloads. &lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;tr&gt;&lt;td style=&quot;width: 16%;&quot; valign=&quot;middle&quot;&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&lt;strong&gt;type raw-data&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt; &lt;/p&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;td style=&quot;width: 84%;&quot; valign=&quot;middle&quot;&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;(Optional) Captures inbound and outbound packets on one or more interfaces. This is the default. &lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;tr&gt;&lt;td style=&quot;width: 16%;&quot; valign=&quot;middle&quot;&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&lt;strong&gt;type webvpn &lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;td style=&quot;width: 84%;&quot; valign=&quot;middle&quot;&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;(Optional) Captures WebVPN data for a specific WebVPN connection. &lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;tr&gt;&lt;td style=&quot;width: 16%;&quot; valign=&quot;middle&quot;&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&lt;strong&gt;url url&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt; &lt;/p&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;td style=&quot;width: 84%;&quot; valign=&quot;middle&quot;&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;(Optional) Specifies a URL for a WebVPN connection capture. &lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;tr&gt;&lt;td style=&quot;width: 16%;&quot; valign=&quot;middle&quot;&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&lt;strong&gt;user webvpn-user&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt; &lt;/p&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;td style=&quot;width: 84%;&quot; valign=&quot;middle&quot;&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;(Optional) Specifies a username for a WebVPN capture. &lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;strong&gt;&lt;u&gt;The Capture command defaults are as follows:&lt;/u&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt; &lt;/p&gt;&lt;ul style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;The capture type is raw data. &lt;/font&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;The buffer size is 512 KB. &lt;/font&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;All the Ethernet types are accepted. &lt;/font&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;All the IP packets are matched. &lt;/font&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;The packet-length is 68 bytes. &lt;/font&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&amp;nbsp;Since
the documentation above&amp;nbsp;is not very&amp;nbsp;easy to interpret for a beginner, I
will be providing a simple monitoring situation and example below to
help familiarize you with the commands associated with running a packet
capture on a Cisco Secure Pix Firewall. &lt;br&gt;&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;table style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; align=&quot;center&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; cellpadding=&quot;2&quot; cellspacing=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&lt;tbody&gt;&lt;tr&gt;&lt;td&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&lt;strong&gt;&lt;u&gt;EXAMPLE: &lt;/u&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;strong&gt;(NOTE: The following scenario is made up, the domain and IP addresses are invalid and purely for example.)&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;You
are wanting to monitor traffic between any users and a questionable
Internet website from the inside to the outside via TCP port 80 for an
internal security auditor needing proof of the transaction. The website
www.madeupsite.com resolves with the IP address 192.168.1.1. In this
example, the internal (Local) IP address is 10.1.1.1 and the external
(Global) NAT IP Address is 192.168.2.2 and the PIX firewall is running
7.X code. &lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;To accomplish this first we will write an extended
access-list to apply to the capture that will allow us to capture any
TCP traffic from any source address or port to the destination address
192.168.1.1 port 80 and vice versa. Next we will apply a capture to
both the inside and outside interfaces of the firewall such that we can
capture all the data specified in the access-list. Then we will then
copy the raw captures in PCAP format to a TFTP server on the inside
network with the IP address 10.1.1.100 such that the files can be
viewed with TCPDUMP or Ethereal. Finally we will remove the captures
and access-list from the PIX firewall.&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;td&gt; &lt;script type=&quot;text/javascript&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
google_ad_client = &quot;pub-6766705380584959&quot;;
google_ad_width = 120;
google_ad_height = 240;
google_ad_format = &quot;120x240_as&quot;;
google_ad_type = &quot;text_image&quot;;
google_ad_channel =&quot;0159511421&quot;;
google_color_border = &quot;FFFFFF&quot;;
google_color_bg = &quot;FFFFFF&quot;;
google_color_link = &quot;000000&quot;;
google_color_text = &quot;000000&quot;;
google_color_url = &quot;000000&quot;;
//--&gt;&lt;/script&gt;
&lt;script type=&quot;text/javascript&quot; src=&quot;http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js&quot;&gt;
&lt;/script&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&lt;iframe id=&quot;google_ads_iframe_slot3&quot; name=&quot;google_ads_iframe_slot3&quot; vspace=&quot;0&quot; hspace=&quot;0&quot; allowtransparency=&quot;true&quot; marginwidth=&quot;0&quot; marginheight=&quot;0&quot; style=&quot;border: 0px none ;&quot; src=&quot;http://googleads.g.doubleclick.net/pagead/blankMessage.html&quot; scrolling=&quot;no&quot; width=&quot;120&quot; frameborder=&quot;0&quot; height=&quot;240&quot;&gt;&lt;/iframe&gt;&lt;br&gt;&lt;/font&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;strong&gt;&lt;u&gt;Start: Secure Shell connection to the PIX:&lt;/u&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;strong&gt;!
Go into global config mode and configure an extended access-list
permitting any tcp traffic from any source host/port to destination
host 192.168.1.1/port 80 and any tcp traffic from source host
192.168.1.1/port 80 to any destination host/port. &lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;PIX# config t&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;PIX(config)# access-list webcap line 1 extended permit tcp any host 192.168.1.1 eq 80&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;PIX(config)# access-list webcap line 2 extended permit tcp host 192.168.1.1 eq 80 any&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;PIX(config)# exit&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;strong&gt;! Exit from global config mode and verify your access-list using the show access-list command.&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;PIX# show access-list webcap&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;access-list webcap; 2 elements&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;access-list webcap line 1 extended permit tcp any host 192.168.1.1 eq www (hitcnt=0)&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;access-list webcap line 2 extended permit tcp host 192.168.1.1 eq www any (hitcnt=0)&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;strong&gt;!
From privileged mode configure two raw-data captures based on the
access-list requirements configured above and apply one to the outside
interface and one to the inside interface of the PIX firewall.&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;PIX# capture webcapinside type raw-data access-list webcap interface inside&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;PIX# capture webcapoutside type raw-data access-list webcap interface outside&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;strong&gt;! Verify your captures using the show capture command.&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;PIX# show capture&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;capture webcapinside type raw-data access-list webcap interface inside&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;capture webcapoutside type raw-data access-list webcap interface outside&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;strong&gt;!
In this example we will assume that the captures were on long enough to
capture the data below. This data consists of a TCP connection from
10.1.1.1 (Local) / 192.168.2.2 (Global) to 192.168.1.1 over port 80.
The capture data is displayed in the PIX console by using the show
capture command.&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;ul style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&lt;strong&gt;NOTE: The data captured on the outside interface shows the source as the global IP.&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;PIX# show capture webcapoutside&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;17 packets captured&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;1: 09:03:02.244906 192.168.2.2.2536 &amp;gt; 192.168.1.1.80: S 39829922:39829922(0) win 65535 &amp;lt;mss 1260,nop,nop,sackOK&amp;gt;&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;2: 09:03:02.275620 192.168.1.1.80 &amp;gt; 192.168.2.2.2536: S 1295066193:1295066193(0) ack 39829923 win 5840 &amp;lt;mss 1380&amp;gt;&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;3: 09:03:02.275940 192.168.2.2.2536 &amp;gt; 192.168.1.1.80: . ack 1295066194 win 65535&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;4: 09:03:02.282303 192.168.2.2.2536 &amp;gt; 192.168.1.1.80: P 39829923:39830620(697) ack 1295066194 win 65535&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;5: 09:03:02.314864 192.168.1.1.80 &amp;gt; 192.168.2.2.2536: . ack 39830620 win 6970&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;6: 09:03:05.029722 192.168.1.1.80 &amp;gt; 192.168.2.2.2536: . 1295066194:1295067454(1260) ack 39830620 win 6970&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;7: 09:03:05.030805 192.168.1.1.80 &amp;gt; 192.168.2.2.2536: . 1295067454:1295068714(1260) ack 39830620 win 6970&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;8: 09:03:05.031309 192.168.2.2.2536 &amp;gt; 192.168.1.1.80: . ack 1295068714 win 65535&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;9: 09:03:05.064129 192.168.1.1.80 &amp;gt; 192.168.2.2.2536: . 1295068714:1295069974(1260) ack 39830620 win 6970&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;10: 09:03:05.065182 192.168.1.1.80 &amp;gt; 192.168.2.2.2536: . 1295069974:1295071234(1260) ack 39830620 win 6970&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;11: 09:03:05.065700 192.168.2.2.2536 &amp;gt; 192.168.1.1.80: . ack 1295071234 win 65535&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;12: 09:03:05.066296 192.168.1.1.80 &amp;gt; 192.168.2.2.2536: . 1295071234:1295072494(1260) ack 39830620 win 6970&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;13: 09:03:05.098597 192.168.1.1.80 &amp;gt; 192.168.2.2.2536: . 1295072494:1295073754(1260) ack 39830620 win 6970&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;14: 09:03:05.099146 192.168.2.2.2536 &amp;gt; 192.168.1.1.80: . ack 1295073754 win 65535&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;15: 09:03:05.099588 192.168.1.1.80 &amp;gt; 192.168.2.2.2536: . 1295073754:1295075014(1260) ack 39830620 win 6970&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;16: 09:03:05.100168 192.168.1.1.80 &amp;gt; 192.168.2.2.2536: P 1295075014:1295075958(944) ack 39830620 win 6970&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;17: 09:03:05.100595 192.168.2.2.2536 &amp;gt; 192.168.1.1.80: . ack 1295075958 win 65535&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;17 packets shown&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;ul style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&lt;strong&gt;NOTE: The data captured on the intside interface shows the source as the local IP.&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;PIX# show capture webcapinside&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;17 packets captured&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;1: 09:03:02.244784 10.1.1.1.2536 &amp;gt; 192.168.1.1.80: S 4015780382:4015780382(0) win 65535 &amp;lt;mss 1260,nop,nop,sackOK&amp;gt;&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;2: 09:03:02.275651 192.168.1.1.80 &amp;gt; 10.1.1.1.2536: S 2468538302:2468538302(0) ack 4015780383 win 5840 &amp;lt;mss 1380&amp;gt;&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;3: 09:03:02.275895 10.1.1.1.2536 &amp;gt; 192.168.1.1.80: . ack 2468538303 win 65535&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;4: 09:03:02.282288 10.1.1.1.2536 &amp;gt; 192.168.1.1.80: P 4015780383:4015781080(697) ack 2468538303 win 65535&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;5: 09:03:02.314894 192.168.1.1.80 &amp;gt; 10.1.1.1.2536: . ack 4015781080 win 6970&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;6: 09:03:05.029753 192.168.1.1.80 &amp;gt; 10.1.1.1.2536: . 2468538303:2468539563(1260) ack 4015781080 win 6970&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;7: 09:03:05.030821 192.168.1.1.80 &amp;gt; 10.1.1.1.2536: . 2468539563:2468540823(1260) ack 4015781080 win 6970&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;8: 09:03:05.031278 10.1.1.1.2536 &amp;gt; 192.168.1.1.80: . ack 2468540823 win 65535&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;9: 09:03:05.064144 192.168.1.1.80 &amp;gt; 10.1.1.1.2536: . 2468540823:2468542083(1260) ack 4015781080 win 6970&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;10: 09:03:05.065197 192.168.1.1.80 &amp;gt; 10.1.1.1.2536: . 2468542083:2468543343(1260) ack 4015781080 win 6970&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;11: 09:03:05.065670 10.1.1.1.2536 &amp;gt; 192.168.1.1.80: . ack 2468543343 win 65535&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;12: 09:03:05.066311 192.168.1.1.80 &amp;gt; 10.1.1.1.2536: . 2468543343:2468544603(1260) ack 4015781080 win 6970&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;13: 09:03:05.098612 192.168.1.1.80 &amp;gt; 10.1.1.1.2536: . 2468544603:2468545863(1260) ack 4015781080 win 6970&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;14: 09:03:05.099131 10.1.1.1.2536 &amp;gt; 192.168.1.1.80: . ack 2468545863 win 65535&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;15: 09:03:05.099619 192.168.1.1.80 &amp;gt; 10.1.1.1.2536: . 2468545863:2468547123(1260) ack 4015781080 win 6970&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;16: 09:03:05.100199 192.168.1.1.80 &amp;gt; 10.1.1.1.2536: P 2468547123:2468548067(944) ack 4015781080 win 6970&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;17: 09:03:05.100580 10.1.1.1.2536 &amp;gt; 192.168.1.1.80: . ack 2468548067 win 65535&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;17 packets shown&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;strong&gt;!
Now we will copy the raw data that we captured to a tftp server on the
inside network with the IP address of 10.1.1.100 in PCAP format using
the copy /pcap command.&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;ul style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&lt;strong&gt;! NOTE: The !!!!! indicates successful transfer of data.&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;PIX# copy /pcap capture:webcapinside tftp:&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;Source capture name [webcapinside]? &amp;lt;enter&amp;gt;&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;Address or name of remote host []? 10.1.1.100&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;Destination filename [webcapinside]? &amp;lt;enter&amp;gt; &lt;strong&gt;! NOTE: The filename could be changed here.&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/font&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&lt;strong&gt;NOTE: The !!!!! indicates successful transfer of data.&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;PIX# copy /pcap capture:webcapoutside tftp:&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;Source capture name [webcapoutside]? &amp;lt;enter&amp;gt;&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;Address or name of remote host []? 10.1.1.100&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;Destination filename [webcapoutside]? &amp;lt;enter&amp;gt; &lt;strong&gt;! NOTE: The filename could be changed here.&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;strong&gt;! Now we will remove the captures from the PIX firewall using the no form of the capture command.&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;PIX# no capture webcapinside type raw-data access-list webcap interface inside.&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;PIX# no capture webcapoutside type raw-data access-list webcap interface outside&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;strong&gt;! Finally we will remove the access-list entries from the PIX firewall using the no form of the access-list command.&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;PIX# config t&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;PIX(config)# access-list webcap line 1 extended permit tcp any host 192.168.1.1 eq 80&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;PIX(config)# access-list webcap line 2 extended permit tcp host 192.168.1.1 eq 80 any&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;PIX(config)# exit&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;PIX#&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&amp;nbsp;Now
we have accomplished our task and the captures wanted by the auditor
can be opened with TCPDUMP or Ethereal from the TFTP server. I hope
you&#39;ve enjoyed this simple tutorial on using the capture command in the
PIX firewall. This command can be very powerful and very useful if
configured properly.&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;---------------------------------------------------------------------------------&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;Article courtesy of www.ComputerNetworkingHelp.com&lt;br&gt;&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/p&gt;</description>
    
    <category domain="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog">Main Page</category>
    
    <category domain="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/Ciscoterms">Cisco terms</category>
    
    
    <ent:cloud ent:href="">
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="Capture" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=Capture">Capture</ent:topic>
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="PIX" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=PIX">PIX</ent:topic>
    
    </ent:cloud>
    
    
    
  </item>
  
  <item>
    <dc:creator>sparky</dc:creator>
    <title>Synchronous Communications Overview</title>
    <link>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/5/18/4190286.html</link>
    <guid>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/5/18/4190286.html</guid>
    <pubDate>Mon, 18 May 2009 14:05:00 +0100</pubDate>
    <description>&lt;!-------------------------main----------------------------&gt;



	
		
		&lt;span class=&quot;pagetitle&quot;&gt;SYNCHRONOUS SERIAL COMMUNICATION OVERVIEW&lt;/span&gt;
	&lt;hr size=&quot;1&quot; noshade=&quot;noshade&quot;&gt;

            &lt;h3&gt;&lt;b&gt;Coordinated Speed&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;p align=&quot;left&quot;&gt;As its name implies, synchronous communication takes place between a transmitter 
  and a receiver operating on synchronized clocks. In a synchronous system, the 
  communication partners have a short conversation before data exchange begins. 
  In this conversation, they align their clocks and agree upon the parameters 
  of the data transfer, including the time interval between bits of data. Any 
  data that falls outside these parameters will be assumed to be either in error 
  or a placeholder used to maintain synchronization. (Synchronous lines must remain 
  constantly active in order to maintain synchronization, thus the need for placeholders 
  between valid data.) Once each side knows what to expect of the other, and knows 
  how to indicate to the other whether what was expected was received, then communication 
  of any length can commence.&lt;br&gt;
  &lt;br&gt;
  The theory behind &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.quatech.com/support/comm-over-asyncserial.php&quot;&gt;asynchronous&lt;/a&gt; and synchronous 
  communication is essentially the same: Point B needs to know when a transmission 
  from Point A begins, when it ends, and if it was processed correctly. However, 
  the difference lies in how the transmission is broken down. Think of the difference 
  in terms of a friendly chat. With asynchronous communication you would need 
  to stop after every word to make sure the listener understood your meaning, 
  and knew that you were about to speak the next word. With synchronous communication, 
  you would establish with your listener that you were speaking English, that 
  you will be speaking words at measured intervals, and that you would utter a 
  complete sentence, or paragraph, or extended soliloquy, before pausing to confirm 
  understanding. Further, you would establish with your listener beforehand that 
  any extraneous noises you make during the speech or between speeches (coughing, 
  burping, hiccupping) should be ignored. Clearly the second approach is much 
  faster, even though initializing communication may take slightly longer. In 
  fact, by replacing the start, stop and parity bits around individual words with 
  start, stop and control (processing instructions and error checking) sequences 
  around large continuous data blocks, synchronous communication is about 30% 
  faster than asynchronous communication, before any other factors are considered.&lt;/p&gt;
            &lt;h3&gt;&lt;b&gt;Clock Synchronization&lt;/b&gt; &lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;p align=&quot;left&quot;&gt;In order to initiate a successful synchronous communication link, several distinct 
  pieces of hardware must be configured around a common clock. This configuration 
  must take two data lines into account, the transmission line (the line it uses 
  to send data) and the reception line (the line it uses to receive data). It 
  is essential not only that all devices in the system be synchronized with each 
  other, but also that each individual device have its transmission and reception 
  lines synchronized as well.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;There are three clocking methods by which to achieve synchronization: internal, external, and 
  recovered clocking. All three methods derive the clock signal for the reception 
  line from the incoming data. The clock signal for the transmission line will 
  always be generated by the devices internal oscillator, but the phase reference 
  used by the internal oscillator differs for each of the clocking methods. When 
  internal clocking is used, the transmit clock is phase locked to the device&#39;s 
  own internal oscillator. For external clocking, the transmit clock is phase 
  locked to the phase of the oscillator belonging to another device in the network. 
  For recovered clocking, the transmit clock phase is locked to the clock derived 
  from the incoming data.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;In general, the DCE device (such as a modem) uses internal clocking, while the DTE device (such 
  as a PC) uses external clocking and synchronizes around the DCE device. (See 
  the&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.quatech.com/support/comm-over-rs-232.php#dte&quot; target=&quot;_top&quot;&gt; RS-232 overview&lt;/a&gt; for 
  a discussion of DTE and DCE devices.) In cases where DTE-DTE or DCE-DCE connections 
  are necessary, one device must be configured atypically, or a device such as 
  a modem-eliminator or tail-circuit buffer must be placed between the two. However, 
  in large networks with multiple devices this is not always possible. One solution 
  for such networks is to have all devices synchronize around a single modem&#39;s 
  clock source. However, this solution has the tendency to result in clock drift, 
  and thus can potentially corrupt data. The other solution is to use recovered 
  clocking so that a modem can derive the clock from data on its reception line 
  then send that information out on its transmit line to be used by the next modem 
  in line, etc.&lt;/p&gt;
            &lt;h3&gt;&lt;b&gt;Byte Oriented Synchronous Protocols&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Synchronous communication can be implemented for &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.quatech.com/support/comm-over-rs-422.php#duplex&quot;&gt;full and half-duplex 
  networks&lt;/a&gt; using bit- or byte-oriented protocols. Half-duplex networks, whether 
  point-to-point or multipoint, can only support communication in one direction 
  at a time. The most commonly used protocol for such networks is IBM&#39;s Binary 
  Synchronous Communication Procedures (BiSync). BiSync is a byte oriented protocol, 
  which means that it approaches transmitted data as “blocks&quot; that must 
  each be decoded and tracked to determine what they are, and what they are telling 
  the receiver to do. &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;In a BiSync system one computer is designated as a control station. It is responsible for initiating 
  all data transfers, and thereby controlling the direction of flow on the communication 
  line. Byte-oriented communication begins with establishing synchronization, 
  it then establishes communication parameters that define instructions for processing 
  given bit sequences. Finally, the actual data will be transmitted, and then 
  followed by several frames that validate the transmission. BiSync transmission 
  is also governed by a strict set of rules for data transmission. These rules 
  require frequent handshaking and validation--speaking in sentences rather than 
  paragraphs between pauses. As a result of the extensive handshaking, and because 
  communication can take place in only one direction, BiSync communication is 
  best suited for low-speed applications.&lt;/p&gt;
            &lt;h3&gt;B&lt;b&gt;yte Oriented Synchronous Protocols&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;p&gt;In bit-oriented protocols, data is accepted as a long string of bits whose order does not impart 
  specific instructions to the receiver. Data is flagged by a set bit pattern 
  at either end, and is validated by a single frame check sequence at the end 
  of the message that either accepts it or demands retransmission. Any bits received 
  outside of valid flag sequences are ignored as placeholders. &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Clearly, bit-oriented communication requires considerably less overhead than byte-oriented communication, 
  because it is not constantly attempting to match bit sequences to numerous predetermined 
  arrangements. The only sequence the bit-oriented protocol is concerned with 
  identifying is the flag sequence. Bit protocols have other advantages over byte 
  protocols as well. In a byte-oriented system, because of the constant handshaking, 
  communication can take place in only one direction at a time. In bit-oriented 
  systems, both ends can talk to each other at once, enabling effective use of 
  full-duplex networks. Further, a single master device using bit protocols can 
  communicate with multiple slave devices by using an address field following 
  the start of message flag. This address field is tailored to each individual 
  slave, and slaves only process data that is specifically addressed to them. 
  Likewise, when the master receives from the slave, it knows from precisely where 
  the transmission originated.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;The two main bit-oriented protocols used today are Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC) and High-Level 
  Data Link Control (HDLC). SDLC, which was developed by IBM in the 1970s, is 
  based around a network of primary and secondary network nodes. The primary controls 
  the network and continually polls the secondaries to determine whether they 
  have data to transmit. Four configurations are available for SDLC networks:&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;b&gt;Point to Point:&lt;/b&gt; one primary connected to one secondary&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;b&gt;Multipoint:&lt;/b&gt; one primary connected to multiple secondaries&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;b&gt;Loop&lt;/b&gt;: one primary connects to the first and last secondary, and secondaries in the 
    middle pass messages through each other to the primary.&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;b&gt;Hub go-ahead:&lt;/b&gt; Uses one inbound and one outbound channel. The primary sends on the outbound 
    channel and the secondaries send on the inbound channel. Secondaries pass 
    messages through each other back to the primary.&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Key to SDLC communication is the control characters it uses to maintain data integrity. The figure below 
  shows the six fields that comprise a single SDLC data frame.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;table align=&quot;center&quot; border=&quot;2&quot; cellpadding=&quot;5&quot; cellspacing=&quot;5&quot; width=&quot;50%&quot;&gt;
  &lt;tbody&gt;&lt;tr&gt; 
    &lt;td width=&quot;10%&quot;&gt; 
      &lt;div align=&quot;center&quot;&gt;Flag&lt;/div&gt;
    &lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;td width=&quot;22%&quot;&gt; 
      &lt;div align=&quot;center&quot;&gt;Address&lt;/div&gt;
    &lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;td width=&quot;23%&quot;&gt; 
      &lt;div align=&quot;center&quot;&gt;Control&lt;/div&gt;
    &lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;td width=&quot;22%&quot;&gt; 
      &lt;div align=&quot;center&quot;&gt;Data&lt;/div&gt;
    &lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;td width=&quot;13%&quot;&gt; 
      &lt;div align=&quot;center&quot;&gt;Frame Check Sequence&lt;/div&gt;
    &lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;td width=&quot;10%&quot;&gt; 
      &lt;div align=&quot;center&quot;&gt;Flag&lt;/div&gt;
    &lt;/td&gt;
  &lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;div align=&quot;center&quot;&gt;&lt;br&gt;
  &lt;i&gt;(SDLC 
  Data Frame)&lt;/i&gt; &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;p&gt;The &lt;b&gt;Flag&lt;/b&gt; field starts and ends error checking. The &lt;b&gt;Address&lt;/b&gt; field is used to indicate 
  the intended data destination, and can be a single address, a group of addresses, 
  or a broadcast to the entire network. The &lt;b&gt;Data&lt;/b&gt; field is the information 
  being transmitted, and the &lt;b&gt;Frame Check Sequence &lt;/b&gt;(FCS) is generally a 
  Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) calculation. A calculation on the transmitted 
  data is done by the transmitter and the result is sent in the FCS. This calculation 
  is then performed by the receiver after data transmission is complete. If the 
  results don&#39;t match, an error is assumed.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;The &lt;b&gt;Control&lt;/b&gt; field uses three different formats depending on the type of SDLC frame. The 
  diagram below breaks out the different data bits in the control field. Explanations 
  for the three control formats follow.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;table align=&quot;center&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; cellpadding=&quot;5&quot; cellspacing=&quot;5&quot; width=&quot;75%&quot;&gt;
  &lt;tbody&gt;&lt;tr&gt;
    &lt;td&gt;
                  &lt;div align=&quot;center&quot;&gt;&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.quatech.com/support/figures/syncdiagram.gif&quot;&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
    &lt;/td&gt;
  &lt;/tr&gt;
  &lt;tr&gt;
    &lt;td&gt;
      &lt;div align=&quot;center&quot;&gt;&lt;i&gt;(Control 
        Field Formats for SDLC Frames)&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
    &lt;/td&gt;
  &lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;br&gt;
  The &lt;b&gt;Information Frame&lt;/b&gt; is used when actual data is being transmitted. 
  It is also used to provide sequencing, flow and error control functions. The 
  sequence number bits are used to indicate the number of the frame that will 
  be sent/received next, and are used by both the primary and secondary nodes. 
  The Poll Final bit is used by the primary to tell the secondary whether or not 
  an immediate response is required. The secondary uses the Poll Final bit to 
  indicate whether the current frame is the last in its response, or whether more 
  frames are coming.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;The &lt;b&gt;Supervisory Frame&lt;/b&gt; is used to control the communication network. It can request or suspend 
  data transfer, report status, and acknowledge receipt of data. Note that since 
  Supervisory frames are used exclusively for control, they do not have data fields.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;The &lt;b&gt;Unnumbered Frame&lt;/b&gt; is unsequenced, can contain one or two bytes, and is used to provide 
  miscellaneous control commands. For instance, it might be used by a primary 
  node to activate the secondary nodes in the network.&lt;/p&gt;
            &lt;p&gt;Another bit-oriented synchronous communication protocol, High Level 
              Data Link Control (HDLC) which is based on SDLC, also uses the frame 
              format described above. However HDLC, which was approved by the 
              International Standards Organization (ISO) in 1979, differs from 
              SDLC in several ways. With HDLC, 32-bit checksums can be used, thereby 
              providing an advantage over SDLC in the sophistication and accuracy 
              of error checking, and thus data integrity. Unlike SDLC, HDLC protocols 
              cannot operate using loop or hub go-ahead configurations.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;The largest difference 
  between the two, is that SDLC uses only a single transfer mode, while HDLC provides 
  three choices. Both use Normal Response Mode (NRM) in which a secondary node 
  is precluded from communicating with a primary node until the primary gives 
  permission. The two additional HDLC modes are Asynchronous Response Mode (ARM) 
  and Asynchronous Balanced Mode (ABM). In ARM mode, any secondary can initiate 
  communication without receiving permission from the primary. ABM mode requires 
  that all devices be configured as combination nodes that, depending on the situation, 
  can assume the role of primary or secondary in the network. In such a system, 
  any device can initiate communication at any time without permission.&lt;/p&gt;

            &lt;h3&gt;&lt;b&gt;Data Buffers&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Though synchronous communication enables transmission of large amounts of data at high speed, it 
  puts in place extensive control and error-checking mechanisms to prevent data 
  corruption. However, in full-duplex networks using bit-oriented protocols, the 
  transmitter is most likely sending frame B before it knows if frame A was received 
  successfully. (This is not as much of a problem in slower byte-oriented protocols 
  where data flows in only one direction at a time.) To maintain the highest possible 
  data rates, synchronous hardware must contain sufficient data buffers to store 
  transmitted data (for resending if necessary) until a successful transfer is 
  confirmed.&lt;/p&gt;
            &lt;p&gt;Quatech synchronous serial PCMCIA and PCI cards use a 1024-byte 
              FIFO for data buffering. Our ISA synchronous cards use DMA. All 
              support both bit and byte protocols, and point-to-point and multipoint 
              full- and half-duplex networks. We also supply SyncDrive and SyncDrive 
              Plus software with all synchronous cards. SYNCDrive provides hardware 
              specific device drivers, DLLs and APIs to simplify incorporating 
              Quatech boards into your BiSync, SDLC and HDLC applications under 
              DOS, Windows 98/98/Me and OS/2. SyncDrive Plus provides device drivers 
              for SDLC and HDLC applications under Windows 2000/XP.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Article courtesy of quatech.com&lt;br&gt;&lt;/p&gt;</description>
    
    <category domain="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/CCNADocs">CCNA Docs</category>
    
    
    <ent:cloud ent:href="">
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="WAN" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=WAN">WAN</ent:topic>
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="serial" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=serial">serial</ent:topic>
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="PPP" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=PPP">PPP</ent:topic>
    
    </ent:cloud>
    
    
    
  </item>
  
  <item>
    <dc:creator>sparky</dc:creator>
    <title>Asynchronous Serial Communications</title>
    <link>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/5/18/4190280.html</link>
    <guid>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/5/18/4190280.html</guid>
    <pubDate>Mon, 18 May 2009 14:03:00 +0100</pubDate>
    <description>&lt;!-------------------------main----------------------------&gt;



	
		
		&lt;span class=&quot;pagetitle&quot;&gt;ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL COMMUNICATION OVERVIEW&lt;/span&gt;
	&lt;hr size=&quot;1&quot; noshade=&quot;noshade&quot;&gt;
	



            &lt;h3&gt;&lt;b&gt;The Simple, Inexpensive Choice&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/h3&gt;
            &lt;p&gt;Most PC serial devices such as mice, keyboards and modems are asynchronous. 
              Asynchronous communication requires nothing more than a transmitter, 
              a receiver and a wire. It is thus the simplest of serial communication 
              protocols, and the least expensive to implement. As the name implies, 
              asynchronous communication is performed between two (or more) devices 
              which operate on independent clocks. Therefore, even if the two 
              clocks agree for a time, there is no guarantee that they will continue 
              to agree over extended periods, and thus there is no guarantee that 
              when point A begins transmitting, point B will begin receiving, 
              or that Point B will continue to sample at the rate Point A transmits. 
              See the figure below for an illustration of what happens when transmission 
              clocks differ significantly. &lt;/p&gt;

            &lt;table align=&quot;center&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; cellpadding=&quot;2&quot; cellspacing=&quot;2&quot; width=&quot;61%&quot;&gt;
              &lt;tbody&gt;&lt;tr&gt; 
                &lt;td align=&quot;center&quot; height=&quot;71&quot;&gt; &lt;img src=&quot;http://www.quatech.com/support/figures/async1.gif&quot;&gt; 
                &lt;/td&gt;
              &lt;/tr&gt;
            &lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt;
 

            &lt;p&gt;To combat this timing problem, asynchronous communication requires 
              additional bits to be added around actual data in order to maintain 
              signal integrity. Asynchronously transmitted data is preceded with 
              a start bit which indicates to the receiver that a word (a chunk 
              of data broken up into individual bits) is about to begin. To avoid 
              confusion with other bits, the start bit is twice the size of any 
              other bit in the transmission. The end of a word is followed by 
              a stop bit, which tells the receiver that the word has come to an 
              end, that it should begin looking for the next start bit, and that 
              any bits it receives before getting the start bit should be ignored. 
              To ensure data integrity, a parity bit is often added between the 
              last bit of data and the stop bit. The parity bit makes sure that 
              the data received is composed of the same number of bits in the 
              same order in which they were sent. Use the link below to view a 
              portrayal of how asynchronous communication works.&lt;/p&gt;asynchronous communication, data is preceded with a start bit
which indicates to the receiver that a word (a chunk of data broken up
into individual bits) is about to begin. To avoid confusion with other
bits, the start bit is twice the size of any other bit in the
transmission. The end of a word is followed by a stop bit, which tells
the receiver that the word has come to an end, that it should begin
looking for the next start bit, and that any bits it receives before
getting the start bit should be ignored. To insure data integrity, a
parity bit is often added between the last bit of data and the stop
bit. The parity bit makes sure that the data received is composed of
the same number of bits in the same order in which they were sent. See
the diagram in Figure 11 for a portrayal of how asynchronous
communication works.

            &lt;h3&gt;&lt;b&gt;Upgraded UARTs For Increased Performance&lt;/b&gt; &lt;/h3&gt;

&lt;p&gt;At the heart of every asynchronous serial system is the Universal
Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter or UART. The UART is responsible for
implementing the asynchronous communication process described above as
both a transmitter and a receiver (both encoding and decoding data
frames). The UART not only controls the transfer of data, but the speed
at which communication takes place. However, the first UARTs could only
handle one byte of information at a time, which meant that the computer
needed to immediately process any transmission or risk losing data as
the next byte of information pushed its way onto the UART. Not only
does this makes for unreliable and slow communication, it can slow down
the entire system.&lt;/p&gt; 

&lt;p&gt;Improved UARTs, such as the 16750 UARTs, increase communication
speed and lower system overhead by offering 64-byte FIFOs (first in
first out buffers). With the 64-byte FIFO buffer, the UART can store
enough information that the data stream need not be suspended while the
computer is busy. This is particularly helpful in heavy multitasking
operating systems such as Windows 95/98/Me/NT/2000/XP and OS/2. &lt;/p&gt;


            &lt;h3&gt;&lt;b&gt;Enhanced Serial Adapters for Even More Speed&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/h3&gt;

&lt;p&gt;Even with top of the line 16750 UARTs, a standard serial board with
a standard 1.8432 MHz clock can only reach data transfer rates of 115.2
kbps. This is because the UART sets the baud rate by dividing down the
clock frequency, and the lower the clock speed, the lower the possible
data rate. An obvious solution to faster data rates is to simply get a
faster clock--and many Quatech serial boards can be custom configured
with upgraded crystals to achieve higher speeds. The other solution is
to create a faster clock from the standard clock by multiplying its
frequency. Quatech enhanced serial adapters do just that. &lt;/p&gt;

&lt;p&gt;All Quatech PCI serial products are based on the enhanced design, as
are some of the ISA and PCMCIA asynchronous serial boards. The standard
clock rate on these boards can be multiplied by a factor of one, two,
four, or eight by using jumper or software controls. High baud rates,
up to 921.6 kbps, can be produced through a combination of changing the
clock rate multiplier and the UART baud rate divisor (see chart below).
For example, a baud rate of 230.4 kbps could be achieved by setting the
clock rate multiplier to X2 and setting a software application for
115.2 kbps. However, because of the limitations of the 16-byte FIFOs on
16550 UARTs, 16750 UARTs will be needed to take full advantage of 4X
and 8X clock multiplying.&lt;/p&gt;


  &lt;table align=&quot;center&quot; border=&quot;2&quot; cellpadding=&quot;5&quot; cellspacing=&quot;0&quot; width=&quot;65%&quot;&gt;&lt;tbody&gt;&lt;tr&gt; 
    &lt;td align=&quot;center&quot; width=&quot;35%&quot;&gt;&lt;b&gt;Clock Rate Multiplier&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;td align=&quot;center&quot; width=&quot;37%&quot;&gt;&lt;b&gt;UART Clock Frequency&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;td align=&quot;center&quot; width=&quot;28%&quot;&gt;&lt;b&gt;Max Data Rate&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
  &lt;/tr&gt;
  &lt;tr&gt; 
    &lt;td align=&quot;center&quot; width=&quot;35%&quot;&gt;X1&lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;td align=&quot;center&quot; width=&quot;37%&quot;&gt;1.832 MHz&lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;td align=&quot;center&quot; width=&quot;28%&quot;&gt;115.2 kbaud&lt;/td&gt;
  &lt;/tr&gt;
  &lt;tr&gt; 
    &lt;td align=&quot;center&quot; width=&quot;35%&quot;&gt;X2&lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;td align=&quot;center&quot; width=&quot;37%&quot;&gt;3.6834 MHz&lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;td align=&quot;center&quot; width=&quot;28%&quot;&gt;230.4 kbaud&lt;/td&gt;
  &lt;/tr&gt;
  &lt;tr&gt; 
    &lt;td align=&quot;center&quot; width=&quot;35%&quot;&gt;X3&lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;td align=&quot;center&quot; width=&quot;37%&quot;&gt;7.3728 MHz&lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;td align=&quot;center&quot; width=&quot;28%&quot;&gt;460.8 kbaud&lt;/td&gt;
  &lt;/tr&gt;
  &lt;tr&gt; 
    &lt;td align=&quot;center&quot; width=&quot;35%&quot;&gt;X4&lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;td align=&quot;center&quot; width=&quot;37%&quot;&gt;14.7456 MHz&lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;td align=&quot;center&quot; width=&quot;28%&quot;&gt;921.6 kbaud&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt;-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------&lt;br&gt;Artice courtesy of quatech.com&lt;br&gt;</description>
    
    <category domain="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog">Main Page</category>
    
    <category domain="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/CCNADocs">CCNA Docs</category>
    
    
    <ent:cloud ent:href="">
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="serial" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=serial">serial</ent:topic>
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="WAN" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=WAN">WAN</ent:topic>
    
    </ent:cloud>
    
    
    
  </item>
  
  <item>
    <dc:creator>sparky</dc:creator>
    <title>Point To Point Protocol</title>
    <link>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/5/5/4175338.html</link>
    <guid>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/5/5/4175338.html</guid>
    <pubDate>Tue, 05 May 2009 10:19:00 +0100</pubDate>
    <description>&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&lt;span class=&quot;content&quot;&gt;&lt;h2 class=&quot;pCT_ChapTitle&quot;&gt;Point-to-Point Protocol
&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;hr class=&quot;Chap1&quot;&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;Introduction&quot;&gt; &lt;/a&gt;

&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020549&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;h2 class=&quot;p_H_Head1&quot;&gt;
Introduction
&lt;/h2&gt;

&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020550&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020551&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;
The &lt;span style=&quot;color: Black; font-style: italic; font-weight: normal;&quot;&gt;Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP)&lt;/span&gt;
originally emerged as an encapsulation protocol for transporting IP
traffic over point-to-point links. PPP also established a standard for
the assignment and management of IP addresses, asynchronous
(start/stop) and bit-oriented synchronous encapsulation, network
protocol multiplexing, link configuration, link quality testing, error
detection, and option negotiation for such capabilities as network
layer address negotiation and data-compression negotiation. PPP
supports these functions by providing an extensible Link Control
Protocol (LCP) and a family of Network Control Protocols (NCPs) to
negotiate optional configuration parameters and facilities. In addition
to IP, PPP supports other protocols, including Novell&#39;s Internetwork
Packet Exchange (IPX) and DECnet. &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;PPP_Components&quot;&gt; &lt;/a&gt;

&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020552&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;h2 class=&quot;p_H_Head1&quot;&gt;
PPP Components
&lt;/h2&gt;

&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020553&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;
PPP provides a method for transmitting datagrams over serial point-to-point links. PPP contains three main components:
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020555&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020554&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu1_Bullet1&quot;&gt;
•&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; width=&quot;19&quot; height=&quot;2&quot;&gt;A
method for encapsulating datagrams over serial links. PPP uses the
High-Level Data Link Control (HDLC) protocol as a basis for
encapsulating datagrams over point-to-point links. (See Chapter 16,
&quot;Synchronous Data Link Control and Derivatives,&quot; for more information
on HDLC.)
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020556&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu1_Bullet1&quot;&gt;
•&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; width=&quot;19&quot; height=&quot;2&quot;&gt;An extensible LCP to establish, configure, and test the data link connection.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020557&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu1_Bullet1&quot;&gt;
•&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; width=&quot;19&quot; height=&quot;2&quot;&gt;A
family of NCPs for establishing and configuring different network layer
protocols. PPP is designed to allow the simultaneous use of multiple
network layer protocols.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;General_Operation&quot;&gt; &lt;/a&gt;

&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020558&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;h2 class=&quot;p_H_Head1&quot;&gt;
General Operation
&lt;/h2&gt;

&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020560&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020559&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020561&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;To
establish communications over a point-to-point link, the originating
PPP first sends LCP frames to configure and (optionally) test the data
link. After the link has been established and optional facilities have
been negotiated as needed by the LCP, the originating PPP sends NCP
frames to choose and configure one or more network layer protocols.
When each of the chosen network layer protocols has been configured,
packets from each network layer protocol can be sent over the link. The
link will remain configured for communications until explicit LCP or
NCP frames close the link, or until some external event occurs (for
example, an inactivity timer expires or a user intervenes).
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;Physical_Layer_Requirements&quot;&gt; &lt;/a&gt;

&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020562&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;h2 class=&quot;p_H_Head1&quot;&gt;
Physical Layer Requirements
&lt;/h2&gt;

&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020563&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020564&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;PPP
is capable of operating across any DTE/DCE interface. Examples include
EIA/TIA-232-C (formerly RS-232-C), EIA/TIA-422 (formerly RS-422),
EIA/TIA-423 (formerly RS-423), and International Telecommunication
Union Telecommunication Standardization Sector (ITU-T) (formerly CCITT)
V.35. The only absolute requirement imposed by PPP is the provision of
a duplex circuit, either dedicated or switched, that can operate in
either an asynchronous or synchronous bit-serial mode, transparent to
PPP link layer frames. PPP does not impose any restrictions regarding
transmission rate other than those imposed by the particular DTE/DCE
interface in use.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;PPP_Link_Layer&quot;&gt; &lt;/a&gt;

&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020565&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;h2 class=&quot;p_H_Head1&quot;&gt;
PPP Link Layer
&lt;/h2&gt;

&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020566&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020567&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;PPP
uses the principles, terminology, and frame structure of the
International Organization for Standardization (ISO) HDLC procedures
(ISO 3309-1979), as modified by ISO 3309:1984/PDAD1 &quot;Addendum 1:
Start/Stop Transmission.&quot; ISO 3309-1979 specifies the HDLC frame
structure for use in synchronous environments. ISO 3309:1984/PDAD1
specifies proposed modifications to ISO 3309-1979 to allow its use in
asynchronous environments. The PPP control procedures use the
definitions and control field encodings standardized in ISO 4335-1979
and ISO 4335-1979/Addendum 1-1979. The PPP frame format appears in
Figure 13-1.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020571&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pTC_TableCap&quot;&gt;
Figure&amp;nbsp;13-1	Six Fields Make Up the PPP Frame&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;div align=&quot;left&quot;&gt;&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/Other/cpress_ill/CT_-_Mar_2002/CT841301.jpg&quot; id=&quot;wp1020569&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; vspace=&quot;0&quot; hspace=&quot;0&quot;&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pTC_TableCap&quot;&gt;

&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020573&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020572&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;
The following descriptions summarize the PPP frame fields illustrated in Figure 13-1:
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020575&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020574&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu1_Bullet1&quot;&gt;
•&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; width=&quot;19&quot; height=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color: Black; font-style: normal; font-weight: bold;&quot;&gt;Flag&lt;/span&gt;—A single byte that indicates the beginning or end of a frame. The flag field consists of the binary sequence 01111110.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020577&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020576&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu1_Bullet1&quot;&gt;
•&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; width=&quot;19&quot; height=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color: Black; font-style: normal; font-weight: bold;&quot;&gt;Address&lt;/span&gt;—A
single byte that contains the binary sequence 11111111, the standard
broadcast address. PPP does not assign individual station addresses.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020578&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020579&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu1_Bullet1&quot;&gt;
•&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; width=&quot;19&quot; height=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color: Black; font-style: normal; font-weight: bold;&quot;&gt;Control&lt;/span&gt;—A
single byte that contains the binary sequence 00000011, which calls for
transmission of user data in an unsequenced frame. A connectionless
link service similar to that of Logical Link Control (LLC) Type 1 is
provided. (For more information about LLC types and frame types, refer
to Chapter 16.)
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020580&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020581&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu1_Bullet1&quot;&gt;
•&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; width=&quot;19&quot; height=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color: Black; font-style: normal; font-weight: bold;&quot;&gt;Protocol&lt;/span&gt;—Two
bytes that identify the protocol encapsulated in the information field
of the frame. The most up-to-date values of the protocol field are
specified in the most recent Assigned Numbers Request For Comments
(RFC).
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020583&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020582&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020584&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020585&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu1_Bullet1&quot;&gt;
•&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; width=&quot;19&quot; height=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color: Black; font-style: normal; font-weight: bold;&quot;&gt;Data&lt;/span&gt;—Zero
or more bytes that contain the datagram for the protocol specified in
the protocol field. The end of the information field is found by
locating the closing flag sequence and allowing 2 bytes for the FCS
field. The default maximum length &lt;br&gt;of the information field is
1,500 bytes. By prior agreement, consenting PPP implementations can use
other values for the maximum information field length.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020587&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020586&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu1_Bullet1&quot;&gt;
•&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; width=&quot;19&quot; height=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color: Black; font-style: normal; font-weight: bold;&quot;&gt;Frame check sequence (FCS)&lt;/span&gt;—Normally
16 bits (2 bytes). By prior agreement, consenting PPP implementations
can use a 32-bit (4-byte) FCS for improved error detection.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020588&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;The LCP can negotiate
modifications to the standard PPP frame structure. Modified frames,
however, always will be clearly distinguishable from standard frames.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;PPP_Link-Control_Protocol&quot;&gt; &lt;/a&gt;

&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020589&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;h2 class=&quot;p_H_Head1&quot;&gt;
PPP Link-Control Protocol
&lt;/h2&gt;

&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020590&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;The PPP LCP provides a
method of establishing, configuring, maintaining, and terminating the
point-to-point connection. LCP goes through four distinct phases.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020591&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;First, link establishment
and configuration negotiation occur. Before any network layer datagrams
(for example, IP) can be exchanged, LCP first must open the connection
and negotiate configuration parameters. This phase is complete when a
configuration-acknowledgment frame has been both sent and received.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020593&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020592&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;This
is followed by link quality determination. LCP allows an optional link
quality determination phase following the link-establishment and
configuration-negotiation phase. In this phase, the link is tested to
determine whether the link quality is sufficient to bring up network
layer protocols. This phase is optional. LCP can delay transmission of
network layer protocol information until this phase is complete.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020595&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020594&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;At
this point, network layer protocol configuration negotiation occurs.
After LCP has finished the link quality determination phase, network
layer protocols can be configured separately by the appropriate NCP and
can be brought up and taken down at any time. If LCP closes the link,
it informs the network layer protocols so that they can take
appropriate action.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020597&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020596&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;Finally,
link termination occurs. LCP can terminate the link at any time. This
usually is done at the request of a user but can happen because of a
physical event, such as the loss of carrier or the expiration of an
idle-period timer.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020599&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;wpmkr1020598&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;Three
classes of LCP frames exist. Link-establishment frames are used to
establish and configure a link. Link-termination frames are used to
terminate a link, and link-maintenance frames are used to manage and
debug a link.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020600&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;
These frames are used to accomplish the work of each of the LCP phases.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;Summary&quot;&gt; &lt;/a&gt;

&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020601&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;h2 class=&quot;p_H_Head1&quot;&gt;
Summary
&lt;/h2&gt;

&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020602&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;The Point-to-Point
Protocol (PPP) originally emerged as an encapsulation protocol for
transporting IP traffic over point-to-point links. PPP also established
a standard for assigning and managing IP addresses, asynchronous and
bit-oriented synchronous encapsulation, network protocol multiplexing,
link configuration, link quality testing, error detection, and option
negotiation for added networking capabilities.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020603&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;
PPP provides a method for transmitting datagrams over serial point-to-point links, which include the following three components:
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020604&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu1_Bullet1&quot;&gt;
•&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; width=&quot;19&quot; height=&quot;2&quot;&gt;A method for encapsulating datagrams over serial links
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020605&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu1_Bullet1&quot;&gt;
•&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; width=&quot;19&quot; height=&quot;2&quot;&gt;An extensible LCP to establish, configure, and test the connection
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020606&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pBu1_Bullet1&quot;&gt;
•&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/i/templates/blank.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; width=&quot;19&quot; height=&quot;2&quot;&gt;A family of NCPs for establishing and configuring different network layer protocols 
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020607&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;PPP is capable of
operating across any DTE/DCE interface. PPP does not impose any
restriction regarding transmission rate other than those imposed by the
particular DTE/DCE interface in use.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;wp1020608&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;Six fields make up the PPP
frame. The PPP LCP provides a method of establishing, configuring,
maintaining, and terminating the point-to-point connection. &lt;br&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;---&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p class=&quot;pB1_Body1&quot;&gt;Article courtesy of the Cisco Internetworking Handbook &lt;br&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/font&gt;</description>
    
    <category domain="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/CCNADocs">CCNA Docs</category>
    
    
    <ent:cloud ent:href="">
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="PPP" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=PPP">PPP</ent:topic>
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="CCNA" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=CCNA">CCNA</ent:topic>
    
    </ent:cloud>
    
    
    
  </item>
  
  <item>
    <dc:creator>sparky</dc:creator>
    <title>Intelligent Platform Management Interface - IPMI</title>
    <link>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/4/6/4145229.html</link>
    <guid>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/4/6/4145229.html</guid>
    <pubDate>Mon, 06 Apr 2009 10:42:00 +0100</pubDate>
    <description>&lt;h1 style=&quot;text-decoration: underline;&quot; id=&quot;firstHeading&quot; class=&quot;firstHeading&quot;&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;4&quot;&gt;Intelligent Platform Management Interface&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/h1&gt;The &lt;b&gt;Intelligent Platform Management Interface&lt;/b&gt; (IPMI) &lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Specification&quot; title=&quot;Specification&quot; class=&quot;mw-redirect&quot;&gt;specification&lt;/a&gt; defines a set of common &lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Interface_%28computer_science%29&quot; title=&quot;Interface (computer science)&quot;&gt;interfaces&lt;/a&gt; to a computer system which &lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/System_administrator&quot; title=&quot;System administrator&quot;&gt;system administrators&lt;/a&gt; can use to monitor system health and manage the system. Several dozen &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.intel.com/design/servers/ipmi/adopterlist.htm&quot; class=&quot;external text&quot; title=&quot;http://www.intel.com/design/servers/ipmi/adopterlist.htm&quot; rel=&quot;nofollow&quot;&gt;companies&lt;/a&gt; support IPMI. Dell, HP, Intel Corporation and NEC Corporation announced IPMI v1.0 on &lt;span class=&quot;mw-formatted-date&quot; title=&quot;1998-09-16&quot;&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/1998&quot; title=&quot;1998&quot;&gt;1998&lt;/a&gt;-&lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/September_16&quot; title=&quot;September 16&quot;&gt;09-16&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/span&gt;, v1.5 on &lt;span class=&quot;mw-formatted-date&quot; title=&quot;2001-03-01&quot;&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/2001&quot; title=&quot;2001&quot;&gt;2001&lt;/a&gt;-&lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/March_1&quot; title=&quot;March 1&quot;&gt;03-01&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/span&gt;, and v2.0 on &lt;span class=&quot;mw-formatted-date&quot; title=&quot;2004-02-14&quot;&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/2004&quot; title=&quot;2004&quot;&gt;2004&lt;/a&gt;-&lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/February_14&quot; title=&quot;February 14&quot;&gt;02-14&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/span&gt;.
&lt;p&gt;IPMI operates independently of the &lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Operating_system&quot; title=&quot;Operating system&quot;&gt;operating system&lt;/a&gt; and allows administrators to manage a system remotely even in the absence of an operating system or the &lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Systems_management&quot; title=&quot;Systems management&quot;&gt;system management&lt;/a&gt; &lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Software&quot; title=&quot;Software&quot; class=&quot;mw-redirect&quot;&gt;software&lt;/a&gt;,
or even if the monitored system is powered off, but connected to a
power source. IPMI can also function after the operating system has
started, and offers enhanced features when used with &lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Systems_management&quot; title=&quot;Systems management&quot;&gt;system management&lt;/a&gt;
software. IPMI prescribes only the structure and format of the
interfaces as a standard, while detailed implementations may vary.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;An implementation of IPMI version 1.5 and later can send out alerts via a direct &lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Serial_communications&quot; title=&quot;Serial communications&quot; class=&quot;mw-redirect&quot;&gt;serial&lt;/a&gt; connection, a &lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Local_area_network&quot; title=&quot;Local area network&quot;&gt;local area network&lt;/a&gt; (LAN) or a &lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Serial_over_LAN&quot; title=&quot;Serial over LAN&quot;&gt;serial over LAN&lt;/a&gt; (SOL) connection to a remote &lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Client_%28computing%29&quot; title=&quot;Client (computing)&quot;&gt;client&lt;/a&gt;.
System administrators can then use IPMI messaging to query platform
status, to review hardware logs, or to issue other requests from a
remote console through the same connections. The standard also defines
an alerting mechanism for the system to send a &lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Simple_network_management_protocol&quot; title=&quot;Simple network management protocol&quot; class=&quot;mw-redirect&quot;&gt;simple network management protocol&lt;/a&gt; (SNMP) platform event trap (PET).&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;The IPMI consists of a main controller called the &lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Baseboard_Management_Controller&quot; title=&quot;Baseboard Management Controller&quot; class=&quot;mw-redirect&quot;&gt;Baseboard Management Controller&lt;/a&gt;
(BMC) and other satellite controllers. The satellite controllers within
the same chassis connect to the BMC via the system interface called
IPMB (Intelligent Platform Management Bus/Bridge) — an enhanced
implementation of &lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/I%C2%B2C&quot; title=&quot;I²C&quot;&gt;I²C&lt;/a&gt;
(Inter-Integrated Circuit). The BMC connects to satellite controllers
or another BMC in another chassis via IPMC (Intelligent Platform
Management Chassis) bus/bridge. It may be managed with the Remote
Management Control Protocol (RMCP), a specialized wire protocol defined
by this specification.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;A &lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Field_Replaceable_Unit&quot; title=&quot;Field Replaceable Unit&quot;&gt;Field Replaceable Unit&lt;/a&gt;
(FRU) holds the inventory (such as vendor id, manufacturer etc.) of
potentially replaceable devices. A Sensor Data Records (SDR) repository
provides the properties of the individual sensors present on the board.
For example, the board may contain sensors for temperature, fan speed,
and voltage.&lt;/p&gt;</description>
    
    <category domain="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/GeneralNetworking">General Networking</category>
    
    
    <ent:cloud ent:href="">
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="IPMI" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=IPMI">IPMI</ent:topic>
    
    </ent:cloud>
    
    
    
  </item>
  
  <item>
    <dc:creator>sparky</dc:creator>
    <title>IEEE 802 Standards</title>
    <link>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/3/23/4130756.html</link>
    <guid>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/3/23/4130756.html</guid>
    <pubDate>Mon, 23 Mar 2009 14:42:00 +0000</pubDate>
    <description>&lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;IEEE 802&lt;/b&gt; refers to a family of &lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/IEEE&quot; title=&quot;IEEE&quot; class=&quot;mw-redirect&quot;&gt;IEEE&lt;/a&gt; standards dealing with &lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Local_area_network&quot; title=&quot;Local area network&quot;&gt;local area networks&lt;/a&gt; and &lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Metropolitan_area_network&quot; title=&quot;Metropolitan area network&quot;&gt;metropolitan area networks&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;More specifically, the IEEE 802 standards are restricted to networks
carrying variable-size packets. (By contrast, in cell-based networks
data is transmitted in short, uniformly sized units called cells. &lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Isochronous&quot; title=&quot;Isochronous&quot;&gt;Isochronous&lt;/a&gt;
networks, where data is transmitted as a steady stream of octets, or
groups of octets, at regular time intervals, are also out of the scope
of this standard.) The number 802 was simply the next free number IEEE
could assign, though “802” is sometimes associated with the date the
first meeting was held — February 1980.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;The services and protocols specified in IEEE 802 map to the lower two layers (Data Link and Physical) of the seven-layer &lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OSI_model&quot; title=&quot;OSI model&quot;&gt;OSI&lt;/a&gt; networking reference model. In fact, IEEE 802 splits the OSI Data Link Layer into two sub-layers named &lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Logical_Link_Control&quot; title=&quot;Logical Link Control&quot;&gt;Logical Link Control&lt;/a&gt; (LLC) and &lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Media_Access_Control&quot; title=&quot;Media Access Control&quot;&gt;Media Access Control&lt;/a&gt; (MAC) , so that the layers can be listed like this:&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Data_link_layer&quot; title=&quot;Data link layer&quot; class=&quot;mw-redirect&quot;&gt;Data link layer&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Logical_Link_Control&quot; title=&quot;Logical Link Control&quot;&gt;LLC Sublayer&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Media_Access_Control&quot; title=&quot;Media Access Control&quot;&gt;MAC Sublayer&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Physical_layer&quot; title=&quot;Physical layer&quot; class=&quot;mw-redirect&quot;&gt;Physical layer&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;p&gt;The IEEE 802 family of standards is maintained by the IEEE 802
LAN/MAN Standards Committee (LMSC). The most widely used standards are
for the Ethernet family, Token Ring, Wireless LAN, Bridging and Virtual
Bridged LANs. An individual &lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Working_group&quot; title=&quot;Working group&quot;&gt;Working Group&lt;/a&gt; provides the focus for each area.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;See its working groups:&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/IEEE_802.1&quot; title=&quot;IEEE 802.1&quot;&gt;IEEE 802.1&lt;/a&gt; &lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Network_bridge&quot; title=&quot;Network bridge&quot;&gt;Bridging (networking)&lt;/a&gt; and Network Management&lt;/li&gt;&lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/IEEE_802.1D&quot; title=&quot;IEEE 802.1D&quot;&gt;802.1D&lt;/a&gt; - MAC Bridges&lt;br&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/IEEE_802.1Q&quot; title=&quot;IEEE 802.1Q&quot;&gt;802.1Q&lt;/a&gt; - Virtual LANs&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/802.1w&quot; title=&quot;802.1w&quot;&gt;802.1w&lt;/a&gt; - Rapid Reconfiguration of Spanning Tree&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/IEEE_802.1Q&quot; title=&quot;IEEE 802.1Q&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/IEEE_802.2&quot; title=&quot;IEEE 802.2&quot;&gt;IEEE 802.2&lt;/a&gt; &lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Logical_Link_Control&quot; title=&quot;Logical Link Control&quot;&gt;Logical link control&lt;/a&gt; (inactive)&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/IEEE_802.3&quot; title=&quot;IEEE 802.3&quot;&gt;IEEE 802.3&lt;/a&gt; &lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ethernet&quot; title=&quot;Ethernet&quot;&gt;Ethernet&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/IEEE_802.4&quot; title=&quot;IEEE 802.4&quot;&gt;IEEE 802.4&lt;/a&gt; &lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Token_bus&quot; title=&quot;Token bus&quot; class=&quot;mw-redirect&quot;&gt;Token bus&lt;/a&gt; (disbanded)&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/IEEE_802.5&quot; title=&quot;IEEE 802.5&quot; class=&quot;mw-redirect&quot;&gt;IEEE 802.5&lt;/a&gt; Defines the MAC layer for a &lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Token_Ring&quot; title=&quot;Token Ring&quot; class=&quot;mw-redirect&quot;&gt;Token Ring&lt;/a&gt; (inactive)&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/IEEE_802.6&quot; title=&quot;IEEE 802.6&quot;&gt;IEEE 802.6&lt;/a&gt; &lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Metropolitan_Area_Network&quot; title=&quot;Metropolitan Area Network&quot; class=&quot;mw-redirect&quot;&gt;Metropolitan Area Networks&lt;/a&gt; (disbanded)&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/IEEE_802.7&quot; title=&quot;IEEE 802.7&quot;&gt;IEEE 802.7&lt;/a&gt; Broadband LAN using Coaxial Cable (disbanded)&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/IEEE_802.8&quot; title=&quot;IEEE 802.8&quot;&gt;IEEE 802.8&lt;/a&gt; Fiber Optic TAG (disbanded)&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/IEEE_802.9&quot; title=&quot;IEEE 802.9&quot;&gt;IEEE 802.9&lt;/a&gt; Integrated Services LAN (disbanded)&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/IEEE_802.10&quot; title=&quot;IEEE 802.10&quot;&gt;IEEE 802.10&lt;/a&gt; Interoperable LAN Security (disbanded)&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/IEEE_802.11&quot; title=&quot;IEEE 802.11&quot;&gt;IEEE 802.11&lt;/a&gt; &lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wireless_LAN&quot; title=&quot;Wireless LAN&quot;&gt;Wireless LAN&lt;/a&gt; &amp;amp; Mesh (&lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wi-Fi&quot; title=&quot;Wi-Fi&quot;&gt;Wi-Fi&lt;/a&gt; certification)&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/IEEE_802.12&quot; title=&quot;IEEE 802.12&quot;&gt;IEEE 802.12&lt;/a&gt; demand priority (disbanded)&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;IEEE 802.13 Not used (officially)&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;IEEE 802.14 &lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cable_modem&quot; title=&quot;Cable modem&quot;&gt;Cable modems&lt;/a&gt; (disbanded)&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/IEEE_802.15&quot; title=&quot;IEEE 802.15&quot;&gt;IEEE 802.15&lt;/a&gt; &lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wireless_PAN&quot; title=&quot;Wireless PAN&quot; class=&quot;mw-redirect&quot;&gt;Wireless PAN&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/IEEE_802.15.1&quot; title=&quot;IEEE 802.15.1&quot; class=&quot;mw-redirect&quot;&gt;IEEE 802.15.1&lt;/a&gt; (&lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bluetooth&quot; title=&quot;Bluetooth&quot;&gt;Bluetooth&lt;/a&gt; certification)&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/IEEE_802.15.4&quot; title=&quot;IEEE 802.15.4&quot; class=&quot;mw-redirect&quot;&gt;IEEE 802.15.4&lt;/a&gt; (&lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ZigBee&quot; title=&quot;ZigBee&quot;&gt;ZigBee&lt;/a&gt; certification)&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/IEEE_802.16&quot; title=&quot;IEEE 802.16&quot;&gt;IEEE 802.16&lt;/a&gt; &lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Broadband_Wireless_Access&quot; title=&quot;Broadband Wireless Access&quot; class=&quot;mw-redirect&quot;&gt;Broadband Wireless Access&lt;/a&gt; (&lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/WiMAX&quot; title=&quot;WiMAX&quot;&gt;WiMAX&lt;/a&gt; certification)
&lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/IEEE_802.16&quot; title=&quot;IEEE 802.16&quot;&gt;IEEE 802.16e&lt;/a&gt; (Mobile) Broadband Wireless Access&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;IEEE 802.16.1 &lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Local_Multipoint_Distribution_Service&quot; title=&quot;Local Multipoint Distribution Service&quot;&gt;Local Multipoint Distribution Service&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/IEEE_802.17&quot; title=&quot;IEEE 802.17&quot; class=&quot;mw-redirect&quot;&gt;IEEE 802.17&lt;/a&gt; Resilient packet ring&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/IEEE_802.18&quot; title=&quot;IEEE 802.18&quot;&gt;IEEE 802.18&lt;/a&gt; Radio Regulatory TAG&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/IEEE_802.19&quot; title=&quot;IEEE 802.19&quot;&gt;IEEE 802.19&lt;/a&gt; Coexistence TAG&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/IEEE_802.20&quot; title=&quot;IEEE 802.20&quot;&gt;IEEE 802.20&lt;/a&gt; Mobile Broadband Wireless Access&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/IEEE_802.21&quot; title=&quot;IEEE 802.21&quot;&gt;IEEE 802.21&lt;/a&gt; Media Independent Handoff&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/IEEE_802.22&quot; title=&quot;IEEE 802.22&quot;&gt;IEEE 802.22&lt;/a&gt; Wireless Regional Area Network&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;</description>
    
    <category domain="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/CCNADocs">CCNA Docs</category>
    
    
    <ent:cloud ent:href="">
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="IEEE" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=IEEE">IEEE</ent:topic>
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="802" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=802">802</ent:topic>
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="Standards" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=Standards">Standards</ent:topic>
    
    </ent:cloud>
    
    
    
  </item>
  
  <item>
    <dc:creator>sparky</dc:creator>
    <title>Router On A Stick</title>
    <link>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/3/23/4130754.html</link>
    <guid>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/3/23/4130754.html</guid>
    <pubDate>Mon, 23 Mar 2009 14:39:00 +0000</pubDate>
    <description>&lt;p&gt;&lt;font style=&quot;font-weight: bold;&quot; size=&quot;4&quot;&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;text-decoration: underline;&quot;&gt;Router On A&amp;nbsp; Stick&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/font&gt;&lt;br&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Basic Cisco theory states that for hosts in different VLANs to
communicate, a Layer 3 device must be involved to handle the routing
between the VLANs. That device is a router, and there are special
considerations that must be taken into account for both the physical
router itself and the configuration you&#39;ll be writing.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The router
will be connected to a switch via a FastEthernet port (or higher). The
router port cannot be a regular Ethernet port, since the router port
will need the ability to send and receive data at the same time.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The
configuration of the interface is where things get interesting. Let&#39;s
say we have two VLANs that will be using router-on-a-stick to
communicate. Here is the VLAN information:&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;VLAN 20:  20.20.20.0 /24&lt;br&gt;
&lt;br&gt;VLAN 40:  40.40.40.0 /24&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The port on the switch that will be
connected to the router&#39;s FastEthernet port must be in trunking mode,
and you must know the trunking protocol in use. We&#39;ll go with the
Cisco-proprietary Dot1q here.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The physical FE port on the router
will not have an IP address. The use of router-on-a-stick mandates the
use of logical subinterfaces. While we don&#39;t have to use the VLAN
numbers for the subinterface numbers, I&#39;ve found this helps you keep
the interfaces straight. One subinterface must be given an IP address
in VLAN 20, and the other will have an IP address in VLAN 40.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;After creating subinterfaces fast 0.20 and fast 0.40, the config looks like this:&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;interface fastethernet0&lt;br&gt;
&lt;br&gt;no ip address&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;interface FastEthernet 0.20&lt;br&gt;
&lt;br&gt;ip address 20.20.20.1 255.255.255.0&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;interface FastEthernet 0.40&lt;br&gt;
&lt;br&gt;ip address 40.40.40.1 255.255.255.0&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Believe it or not, you&#39;re
almost done! Now we need the encapsulation statement under each
subinterface. The subinterface statement must reflect both the VLAN
number and the encapsulation type being used. When we&#39;re finished, the
config would look like this:&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;interface fastethernet0&lt;br&gt;
&lt;br&gt;no ip address&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;interface FastEthernet 0.20&lt;br&gt;
&lt;br&gt;ip address 20.20.20.1 255.255.255.0&lt;br&gt;
&lt;br&gt;encapsulation dot1q 20&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;interface FastEthernet 0.40&lt;br&gt;
&lt;br&gt;ip address 40.40.40.1  255.255.255.0&lt;br&gt;
&lt;br&gt;encapsulation dot1q 40&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;And that&#39;s it!  Your hosts in VLAN 20 should now be able to communicate with hosts in VLAN 40, and vice versa.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;A
couple of final troubleshooting points - the most common error with
router-on-a-stick is to put the wrong vlan number in the encapsulation
statement. Also, make sure you have configured the router&#39;s IP address
in VLAN 20 as the default gateway for hosts in VLAN 20, and do the same
for VLAN 40.&lt;/p&gt;</description>
    
    <category domain="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/CCNADocs">CCNA Docs</category>
    
    
    <ent:cloud ent:href="">
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="Trunking" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=Trunking">Trunking</ent:topic>
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="Routing" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=Routing">Routing</ent:topic>
    
    </ent:cloud>
    
    
    
  </item>
  
  <item>
    <dc:creator>sparky</dc:creator>
    <title>STP</title>
    <link>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/3/2/4109843.html</link>
    <guid>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/3/2/4109843.html</guid>
    <pubDate>Mon, 02 Mar 2009 15:00:00 +0000</pubDate>
    <description>&lt;h1&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;xtocid69350&quot;&gt; &lt;font style=&quot;text-decoration: underline;&quot; size=&quot;4&quot;&gt;Understanding &lt;/font&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;font style=&quot;text-decoration: underline;&quot; size=&quot;4&quot;&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;20666&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;843&quot;&gt;Spanning-Tree Protocol - www.cisco.com&lt;br&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/h1&gt;
&lt;p&gt; &lt;a name=&quot;MARKER-2-1&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;Spanning-Tree Protocol is a link
management protocol that provides path redundancy while preventing
undesirable loops in the network. For an Ethernet network to function
properly, only one active path can exist between two stations. &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt; Multiple active paths between stations cause loops in the network.
If a loop exists in the network topology, the potential exists for
duplication of messages. When loops occur, some switches see stations
appear on both sides of the switch. This condition confuses the
forwarding algorithm and allows duplicate frames to be forwarded.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt; To provide path redundancy, Spanning-Tree Protocol defines a tree
that spans all switches in an extended network. Spanning-Tree Protocol
forces certain redundant data paths into a standby (blocked) state. If
one network segment in the Spanning-Tree Protocol becomes unreachable,
or if Spanning-Tree Protocol costs change, the spanning-tree algorithm
reconfigures the spanning-tree topology and reestablishes the link by
activating the standby path.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt; Spanning-Tree Protocol operation is transparent to end stations,
which are unaware whether they are connected to a single LAN segment or
a switched LAN of multiple segments.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;HEADING1-5&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;xtocid69351&quot;&gt; &lt;font style=&quot;text-decoration: underline;&quot; size=&quot;4&quot;&gt;Election of the Root Switch&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;p&gt; All switches in an extended LAN participating in Spanning-Tree
Protocol gather information on other switches in the network through an
exchange of data messages. These messages are bridge protocol data
units (BPDUs). This exchange of messages results in the following:&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt;The election of a unique root switch for the stable spanning-tree network topology.
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;The election of a designated switch for every switched LAN segment.
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;The removal of loops in the switched network by placing redundant switch ports in a backup state.
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;p&gt; The Spanning-Tree Protocol root switch is the logical center of the
spanning-tree topology in a switched network. All paths that are not
needed to reach the root switch from anywhere in the switched network
are placed in Spanning-Tree Protocol backup mode. &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/product/rtrmgmt/sw_ntman/cwsimain/cwsi2/cwsiug2/vlan2/stpapp.htm#15822&quot;&gt;Table C-1&lt;/a&gt; describes the root switch variables, that affect the entire spanning-tree performance.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;b&gt; Table&amp;nbsp; C-1: &lt;a name=&quot;15822&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;1742&quot;&gt;Root Switch Variables Affecting STP&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/b&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;1742&quot;&gt; &lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;table border=&quot;1&quot;&gt;&lt;tbody&gt;&lt;tr valign=&quot;top&quot;&gt;&lt;th align=&quot;left&quot;&gt;&lt;b&gt;&lt;b&gt;Variable&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/b&gt;
&lt;/th&gt;&lt;th align=&quot;left&quot;&gt;&lt;b&gt;Description&lt;/b&gt;
&lt;/th&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;tr valign=&quot;top&quot;&gt;&lt;th align=&quot;left&quot;&gt;&lt;p&gt; Hello Time&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/th&gt;&lt;th align=&quot;left&quot;&gt;&lt;p&gt; Determines how often the switch broadcasts its hello message to other switches.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/th&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;tr valign=&quot;top&quot;&gt;&lt;td&gt; Maximum Age Timer
&lt;/td&gt;&lt;td&gt; Measures the age of the received protocol information
recorded for a port and ensures that this information is discarded when
its age limit exceeds the value to the maximum age parameter recorded
by the switch. The timeout value for this timer is the maximum age
parameter of the switches.
&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;tr valign=&quot;top&quot;&gt;&lt;td&gt; Forward Delay Timer
&lt;/td&gt;&lt;td&gt; Monitors the time spent by a port in the learning and
listening states. The timeout value is the forward delay parameter of
the switches.
&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;1742&quot;&gt; BPDUs contain information
about the transmitting switch and its ports, including switch and port
Media Access Control (MAC) addresses, switch priority, port priority,
and port cost. The Spanning-Tree Protocol uses this information to
elect the root switch and root port for the switched network, as well
as the root port and designated port for each switched segment.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;1742&quot;&gt; &lt;/a&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/product/rtrmgmt/sw_ntman/cwsimain/cwsi2/cwsiug2/vlan2/stpapp.htm#41768&quot;&gt;Figure C-1&lt;/a&gt; shows how BPDUs enable a Spanning-Tree Protocol topology.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;b&gt;Figure&amp;nbsp;C-1: &lt;a name=&quot;41768&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;1474&quot;&gt;BPDUs Enabling a Stable Spanning-Tree Protocol Topology&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/b&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;1474&quot;&gt; &lt;br&gt;&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/univercd/illus/s/87/s5687.gif&quot; align=&quot;top&quot;&gt;&lt;br&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;HEADING1-51&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;xtocid69352&quot;&gt; &lt;font style=&quot;text-decoration: underline;&quot; size=&quot;4&quot;&gt;Bridge Protocol Data Units&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;p&gt; The stable active topology of a switched network is determined by the following:&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt;The unique switch identifier (MAC address) associated with each switch.
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;The path cost to the root associated with each switch port.
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;The port identifier (MAC address) associated with each switch port.
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;p&gt; Each configuration BPDU contains the following minimal information:&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt;The unique identifier of the switch that the transmitting switch believes to be the root switch.
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;The cost of the path to the root from the transmitting port.
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;The identifier of the transmitting port.
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;p&gt; The switch sends configuration BPDUs to communicate and compute the
spanning-tree topology. A MAC frame conveying a BPDU sends the switch
group address to the destination address field. All switches connected
to the LAN on which the frame is transmitted receive the BPDU. BPDUs
are not directly forwarded by the switch, but the information contained
in the frame can be used to calculate a BPDU by the receiving switch,
and, if the topology changes, instigate a BPDU transmission.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt; A BPDU exchange results in the following:&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt;One switch is elected as the root switch.
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;The shortest distance to the root switch is calculated for each switch.
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;A designated switch is selected. This is the switch
closest to the root switch through which frames will be forwarded to
the root.
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;A port for each switch is selected. This is the port providing the best path from the switch to the root switch.
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Ports included in the Spanning-Tree Protocol are selected.
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;HEADING1-67&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;h5&gt; Spanning-Tree Protocol Configuration&lt;/h5&gt;
&lt;p&gt; If all switches are enabled with default settings, the switch with
the lowest MAC address in the network becomes the root switch. The
network in &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/product/rtrmgmt/sw_ntman/cwsimain/cwsi2/cwsiug2/vlan2/stpapp.htm#39855&quot;&gt;Figure C-2&lt;/a&gt;
assumes that Switch A has the lowest MAC address and is therefore the
root switch. However, due to traffic patterns, number of forwarding
ports, or line types, Switch A might not be the ideal root switch. By
increasing the priority (lowering the numerical priority number) of the
ideal switch so that it then becomes the root switch, you force a
Spanning-Tree Protocol recalculation to form a new, stable topology.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;b&gt;Figure&amp;nbsp;C-2: &lt;a name=&quot;39855&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;1501&quot;&gt;Configuring a Stable Topology&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/b&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;1501&quot;&gt; &lt;br&gt;&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/univercd/illus/s/88/s5688.gif&quot; align=&quot;top&quot;&gt;&lt;br&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;1501&quot;&gt; When the stable Spanning-Tree Protocol topology is
based on default parameters, the path between source and destination
stations in a switched network might not be the most ideal. For
instance, connecting higher speed links to a port that has a higher
number than the current root port can cause a root-port change. The
point is to make the fastest link the root port.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;1501&quot;&gt; For example, assume that Port 2 on Switch B in &lt;/a&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/product/rtrmgmt/sw_ntman/cwsimain/cwsi2/cwsiug2/vlan2/stpapp.htm#14152&quot;&gt;Figure C-3&lt;/a&gt;
is a fiber-optic link, and that Port 1 on Switch B (a UTP link) is the
root port. Network traffic might be more efficiently handled over the
high-speed fiber-optic link. By changing the Port Priority parameter
for Port 2 to a higher priority (lower numerical value) than Port 1,
Port 2 becomes the root port. The same change can occur by changing the
Port Cost parameter for Port 2 to a lower value than that of Port 1.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;b&gt;Figure&amp;nbsp;C-3: &lt;a name=&quot;14152&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;1828&quot;&gt;Default Parameters Resulting in Lower Network Efficiency&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/b&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;1828&quot;&gt; &lt;br&gt;&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/univercd/illus/s/90/s5690.gif&quot; align=&quot;top&quot;&gt;&lt;br&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;HEADING1-75&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;xtocid69353&quot;&gt; &lt;font style=&quot;text-decoration: underline;&quot; size=&quot;4&quot;&gt;Spanning-Tree Protocol Port States&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;p&gt; Propagation delays can occur when protocol information is passed
through a switched LAN. As a result, topology changes can take place at
different times and at different places in a switched network. When a
switch port transitions directly from non-participation in the stable
topology to the forwarding state, it can create temporary data loops.
Ports must wait for new topology information to propagate through the
switched LAN before starting to forward frames. They must also allow
the frame lifetime to expire for frames that have been forwarded using
the old topology.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt; Each port on a switch using Spanning-Tree Protocol exists in one of the following five states:&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt;Blocking
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Listening
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Learning
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Forwarding
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Disabled
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;p&gt; A port moves through these five states as follows:&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt;From initialization to blocking
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;From blocking to listening or to disabled
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;From listening to learning or to disabled
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;From learning to forwarding or to disabled
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;From forwarding to disabled
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;p&gt; &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/product/rtrmgmt/sw_ntman/cwsimain/cwsi2/cwsiug2/vlan2/stpapp.htm#31509&quot;&gt;Figure C-4&lt;/a&gt; illustrates how a port moves through the five states.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;b&gt;Figure&amp;nbsp;C-4: &lt;a name=&quot;31509&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;1536&quot;&gt;Spanning-Tree Protocol Port States&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/b&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;1536&quot;&gt; &lt;br&gt;&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/univercd/illus/s/91/s5691.gif&quot; align=&quot;top&quot;&gt;&lt;br&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;1536&quot;&gt; You can modify each port state by using management
software. When Spanning-Tree Protocol is enabled, every switch in the
network goes through the blocking state and the transitory states of
listening and learning at power up. If properly configured, the ports
then stabilize to the forwarding or blocking state.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;1536&quot;&gt; When the spanning-tree algorithm determines that a port should be placed in the forwarding state, the following occurs:&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;1536&quot;&gt;The port is put into the listening state
while it waits for protocol information that suggests it should go to
the blocking state.&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;1536&quot;&gt;The port waits for the expiration of a protocol timer that moves the port to the learning state.&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;1536&quot;&gt;In the learning state, the port
continues to block frame forwarding as it learns station location
information for the forwarding database.&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;1536&quot;&gt;The expiration of a protocol timer moves the port to the forwarding state, where both learning and forwarding are enabled.&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;HEADING1-98&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;h5&gt; Blocking State&lt;/h5&gt;
&lt;p&gt; A port in the blocking state does not participate in frame forwarding, as shown in &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/product/rtrmgmt/sw_ntman/cwsimain/cwsi2/cwsiug2/vlan2/stpapp.htm#26212&quot;&gt;Figure C-5&lt;/a&gt;.
After initialization, a BPDU is sent to each port in the switch. A
switch initially assumes it is the root until it exchanges BPDUs with
other switches. This exchange establishes which switch in the network
is really the root. If only one switch resides in the network, no
exchange occurs, the forward delay timer expires, and the ports move to
the listening state. A switch always enters the blocking state
following switch initialization.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;b&gt;Figure&amp;nbsp;C-5: &lt;a name=&quot;26212&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;1554&quot;&gt;Port States&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/b&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;1554&quot;&gt; &lt;br&gt;&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/univercd/illus/s/93/s5693.gif&quot; align=&quot;top&quot;&gt;&lt;br&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;1554&quot;&gt; A port in the blocking state performs as follows:&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;1554&quot;&gt;Discards frames received from the attached segment.&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;1554&quot;&gt;Discards frames switched from another port for forwarding.&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;1554&quot;&gt;Does not incorporate station location
into its address database. (There is no learning at this point, so
there is no address database update.)&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;1554&quot;&gt;Receives BPDUs and directs them to the system module.&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;1554&quot;&gt;Does not transmit BPDUs received from the system module.&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;1554&quot;&gt;Receives and responds to network management messages.&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;HEADING1-109&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;h3&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;xtocid69354&quot;&gt; &lt;font size=&quot;4&quot;&gt;Listening State&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;p&gt; The listening state is the first transitional state a port enters
after the blocking state, when Spanning-Tree Protocol determines that
the port should participate in frame forwarding. Learning is disabled
in the listening state. &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/product/rtrmgmt/sw_ntman/cwsimain/cwsi2/cwsiug2/vlan2/stpapp.htm#26212&quot;&gt;Figure C-5&lt;/a&gt; shows a port in the listening state.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt; A port in the listening state performs as follows:&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt;Discards frames received from the attached segment.
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Discards frames switched from another port for forwarding.
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Does not incorporate station location into its address
database. (There is no learning at this point, so there is no address
database update.)
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Receives BPDUs and directs them to the system module.
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Processes BPDUs received from the system module.
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Receives and responds to network management messages.
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;HEADING1-118&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;h3&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;xtocid69355&quot;&gt; &lt;font size=&quot;4&quot;&gt;Learning State&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;p&gt; A port in the learning state is preparing to participate in frame
forwarding. This is the second transitional state through which a port
moves in anticipation of frame forwarding. The port enters the learning
state from the listening state through the operation of Spanning-Tree
Protocol.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt; A port in the learning state performs as follows:&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt;Discards frames received from the attached segment.
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Discards frames switched from another port for forwarding.
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Incorporates station location into its address database.
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Receives BPDUs and directs them to the system module.
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Receives, processes, and transmits BPDUs received from the system module.
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Receives and responds to network management messages.
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;HEADING1-127&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;h3&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;xtocid69356&quot;&gt; &lt;font size=&quot;4&quot;&gt;Forwarding State&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;p&gt; A port in the forwarding state forwards frames, as shown in &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/product/rtrmgmt/sw_ntman/cwsimain/cwsi2/cwsiug2/vlan2/stpapp.htm#26212&quot;&gt;Figure C-5&lt;/a&gt;. The port enters the forwarding state from the learning state through the operation of Spanning-Tree Protocol.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt; A port in the forwarding state performs as follows:&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt;Forwards frames received from the attached segment.
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Forwards frames switched from another port for forwarding.
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Incorporates station location information into its address database.
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Receives BPDUs and directs them to the system module.
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Processes BPDUs received from the system module.
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Receives and responds to network management messages.
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;table&gt;&lt;tbody&gt;&lt;tr&gt;&lt;td&gt;&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/univercd/illus/warning.gif&quot; align=&quot;top&quot;&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;td&gt;&lt;b&gt;Caution&lt;/b&gt;&amp;nbsp;Use the immediate-forwarding (&lt;b&gt;portfast&lt;/b&gt;)
mode only on ports connected to individual workstations to allow these
ports to come up and go directly to the forwarding state, rather than
having to go through the entire spanning-tree initialization process.
To prevent illegal topologies, enable Spanning-Tree Protocol on ports
connected to switches or other devices that forward messages.&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;HEADING1-137&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;h5&gt; Disabled State&lt;/h5&gt;
&lt;p&gt; A port in the disabled state does not participate in frame forwarding or the operation of Spanning-Tree Protocol, as shown in &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/product/rtrmgmt/sw_ntman/cwsimain/cwsi2/cwsiug2/vlan2/stpapp.htm#22347&quot;&gt;Figure C-6&lt;/a&gt;. A port in the disabled state is virtually nonoperational.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;b&gt;Figure&amp;nbsp;C-6: &lt;a name=&quot;22347&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;1887&quot;&gt;Port 2 in Disabled State&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/b&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;1887&quot;&gt; &lt;br&gt;&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/univercd/illus/s/96/s5696.gif&quot; align=&quot;top&quot;&gt;&lt;br&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;1887&quot;&gt; A disabled port performs as follows:&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;1887&quot;&gt;Discards frames received from the attached segment.&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;1887&quot;&gt;Discards frames switched from another port for forwarding.&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;1887&quot;&gt;Does not incorporate station location into its address database. (There is no learning, so there is no address database update.)&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;1887&quot;&gt;Receives BPDUs, but does not direct them to the system module.&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;1887&quot;&gt;Does not receive BPDUs for transmission from the system module.&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;1887&quot;&gt;Receives and responds to network management message&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;</description>
    
    <category domain="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/CCNADocs">CCNA Docs</category>
    
    
    
    
  </item>
  
  <item>
    <dc:creator>sparky</dc:creator>
    <title>VLANs and Trunking</title>
    <link>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/2/24/4103133.html</link>
    <guid>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/2/24/4103133.html</guid>
    <pubDate>Tue, 24 Feb 2009 11:55:00 +0000</pubDate>
    <description>&lt;h2&gt;Trunking&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;p&gt;VLANs are local to each switch&#39;s database, and VLAN information is
not passed between switches.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;p&gt;Trunk links provide VLAN identification for frames traveling between
switches.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;p&gt;Cisco switches have two Ethernet trunking mechanisms: ISL and IEEE
802.1Q.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;p&gt;Certain types of switches can negotiate trunk links.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;p&gt;Trunks carry traffic from all VLANs to and from the switch by default but
can be configured to carry only specified VLAN traffic.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;p&gt;Trunk links must be configured to allow trunking on each end of the
link.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;h3&gt;Enabling Trunking&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Trunk links are required to pass VLAN information between switches. A port on
a Cisco switch is either an access port or a trunk port. Access ports belong to
a single VLAN and do not provide any identifying marks on the frames that are
passed between switches. Access ports also carry traffic that comes from only
the VLAN assigned to the port. A trunk port is by default a member of &lt;i&gt;all&lt;/i&gt;
the VLANs that exist on the switch and carry traffic for all those VLANs between
the switches. To distinguish between the traffic flows, a trunk port must mark
the frames with special tags as they pass between the switches. Trunking is a
function that must be enabled on both sides of a link. If two switches are
connected together, for example, both switch ports must be configured for
trunking, and they must both be configured with the same tagging mechanism (ISL
or 802.1Q).&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;To enable trunking between the switches, use the following steps:&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;ol&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;p&gt;Enable trunking on a port.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;ol type=&quot;a&quot;&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;p&gt;Enable the trunk:&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;table border=&quot;2&quot; cellpadding=&quot;2&quot; cellspacing=&quot;2&quot;&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr valign=&quot;top&quot;&gt;
&lt;td colspan=&quot;1&quot; rowspan=&quot;1&quot; valign=&quot;top&quot; width=&quot;48&quot;&gt;
&lt;p&gt;COS&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td colspan=&quot;1&quot; rowspan=&quot;1&quot; valign=&quot;top&quot; width=&quot;289&quot;&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;tt&gt;&lt;b&gt;set trunk &lt;/b&gt;&lt;i&gt;mod/port&lt;b&gt; &lt;/b&gt;&lt;/i&gt;[&lt;b&gt;auto &lt;/b&gt;&lt;/tt&gt;|&lt;tt&gt;&lt;b&gt;
desirable &lt;/b&gt;&lt;/tt&gt;|&lt;tt&gt;&lt;b&gt; on &lt;/b&gt;&lt;/tt&gt;|&lt;tt&gt;&lt;b&gt; nonegotiate &lt;/b&gt;&lt;/tt&gt;|&lt;tt&gt;&lt;b&gt;
off&lt;/b&gt;]&lt;b&gt; &lt;/b&gt;&lt;/tt&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr valign=&quot;top&quot;&gt;
&lt;td colspan=&quot;1&quot; rowspan=&quot;1&quot; valign=&quot;top&quot; width=&quot;48&quot;&gt;
&lt;p&gt;IOS&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td colspan=&quot;1&quot; rowspan=&quot;1&quot; valign=&quot;top&quot; width=&quot;289&quot;&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;tt&gt;(global)&lt;b&gt; interface &lt;/b&gt;&lt;i&gt;type mod/port&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/tt&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;tt&gt;&lt;b&gt;&lt;i&gt;(&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/b&gt;interface) &lt;b&gt;switchport mode dynamic [auto
&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/tt&gt;|&lt;tt&gt;&lt;b&gt; desirable]&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/tt&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;tt&gt;(interface) &lt;b&gt;switchport mode trunk&lt;/b&gt; &lt;/tt&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;tt&gt;(interface) &lt;b&gt;switchport nonegotiate&lt;/b&gt; &lt;/tt&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;&lt;br&gt;
&lt;p&gt;The most basic way to configure a trunk link is using the
option &lt;b&gt;on&lt;/b&gt;. This option enables the trunk and requires that you also
specify a tagging mechanism for the trunk. For IOS devices, the command
&lt;b&gt;switchport mode trunk &lt;/b&gt;is equivalent to the &lt;b&gt;set trunk
&lt;/b&gt;&lt;i&gt;mod/port&lt;/i&gt;&lt;b&gt; on &lt;/b&gt;command. When specifying the option &lt;b&gt;on&lt;/b&gt;, you
must also choose a tagging mechanism (see Step 1b).&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;note&quot;&gt;
&lt;p class=&quot;normaltitle&quot;&gt;&lt;b&gt;NOTE&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Some IOS switches do not support Dynamic Trunking Protocol. For these
switches, the only command that you can use to configure trunking is
&lt;b&gt;switchport mode trunk&lt;/b&gt;, which essentially turns trunking on.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Many Cisco switches employ an automatic trunking mechanism known as the
&lt;i&gt;Dynamic Trunking Protocol&lt;/i&gt; (DTP), which allows a trunk to be dynamically
established between two switches. All COS switches and integrated IOS switches
can use the DTP protocol to form a trunk link. The COS options &lt;b&gt;auto&lt;/b&gt;,&lt;b&gt;
desirable&lt;/b&gt;, and &lt;b&gt;on&lt;/b&gt; and the IOS options of &lt;b&gt;dynamic
auto&lt;/b&gt;,&lt;b&gt; dynamic desirable&lt;/b&gt;, and &lt;b&gt;trunk &lt;/b&gt;configure a trunk
link using DTP. If one side of the link is configured to trunk and will send DTP
signals, the other side of the link will dynamically begin to trunk if the
options match correctly. &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;If you want to enable trunking and not send any DTP signaling, use the option
&lt;b&gt;nonegotiate &lt;/b&gt;for switches that support that function. If you want to
disable trunking completely, use the &lt;b&gt;off &lt;/b&gt;option for a COS switch or the
&lt;b&gt;no switchport mode trunk&lt;/b&gt; command on an IOS switch.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Table 6-2 shows the DTP signaling and the characteristics of each mode.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;note&quot;&gt;
&lt;p class=&quot;tiptitle&quot;&gt;&lt;b&gt;TIP&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;It is important to remember that not all switches support DTP and might not
establish a&amp;nbsp;trunk without intervention. Also remember that DTP offers no
benefit when you are trunking with a non-Cisco switch. To eliminate any overhead
associated with DTP, it is useful to use the &lt;b&gt;nonegotiate &lt;/b&gt;option when DTP
is not supported.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;note&quot;&gt;
&lt;p class=&quot;normaltitle&quot;&gt;&lt;b&gt;NOTE&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;When enabling trunking, it is not possible to specify a range of ports.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;h4&gt;Table 6-2	Trunking Mode Characteristics&lt;/h4&gt;
&lt;table border=&quot;2&quot; cellpadding=&quot;2&quot; cellspacing=&quot;2&quot;&gt;
&lt;thead&gt;
&lt;tr valign=&quot;top&quot;&gt;
&lt;td colspan=&quot;1&quot; rowspan=&quot;1&quot; valign=&quot;top&quot; width=&quot;134&quot;&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;Trunking Mode&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td colspan=&quot;1&quot; rowspan=&quot;1&quot; valign=&quot;top&quot; width=&quot;226&quot;&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;Characteristics&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/thead&gt;&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr valign=&quot;top&quot;&gt;
&lt;td colspan=&quot;1&quot; rowspan=&quot;1&quot; valign=&quot;top&quot; width=&quot;134&quot;&gt;
&lt;p&gt;COS = &lt;b&gt;on&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;IOS = &lt;b&gt;mode trunk&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td colspan=&quot;1&quot; rowspan=&quot;1&quot; valign=&quot;top&quot; width=&quot;226&quot;&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Trunking is on for these links. They will also send DTP signals that attempt
to initiate a trunk with the other side. This will form a trunk with other ports
in the states &lt;b&gt;on&lt;/b&gt;,&lt;b&gt; auto&lt;/b&gt;,&lt;b&gt; &lt;/b&gt;or &lt;b&gt;desirable &lt;/b&gt;that are
running DTP. A port that is in &lt;b&gt;on &lt;/b&gt;mode&amp;nbsp;always tags frames sent out
the port.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr valign=&quot;top&quot;&gt;
&lt;td colspan=&quot;1&quot; rowspan=&quot;1&quot; valign=&quot;top&quot; width=&quot;134&quot;&gt;
&lt;p&gt;COS = &lt;b&gt;desirable&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;IOS = &lt;b&gt;mode dynamic desirable&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td colspan=&quot;1&quot; rowspan=&quot;1&quot; valign=&quot;top&quot; width=&quot;226&quot;&gt;
&lt;p&gt;These links would like to become trunk links and will send DTP signals that
attempt to initiate a trunk. They will only become trunk links if the other side
responds to the DTP signal. This will form a trunk with other ports in the
states &lt;b&gt;on&lt;/b&gt;,&lt;b&gt; auto&lt;/b&gt;, or &lt;b&gt;desirable &lt;/b&gt;that are running DTP. This is
the default mode for the 6000 running Supervisor IOS.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr valign=&quot;top&quot;&gt;
&lt;td colspan=&quot;1&quot; rowspan=&quot;1&quot; valign=&quot;top&quot; width=&quot;134&quot;&gt;
&lt;p&gt;COS = &lt;b&gt;auto&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;IOS = &lt;b&gt;mode dynamic auto&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td colspan=&quot;1&quot; rowspan=&quot;1&quot; valign=&quot;top&quot; width=&quot;226&quot;&gt;
&lt;p&gt;These links will only become trunk links if they receive a DTP signal from a
link that is already trunking or desires to trunk. This will only form a trunk
with other ports in the states &lt;b&gt;on&lt;/b&gt; or &lt;b&gt;desirable&lt;/b&gt;. This is the
default mode for COS switches.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr valign=&quot;top&quot;&gt;
&lt;td colspan=&quot;1&quot; rowspan=&quot;1&quot; valign=&quot;top&quot; width=&quot;134&quot;&gt;
&lt;p&gt;COS = &lt;b&gt;nonegotiate&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;IOS = &lt;b&gt;mode nonegotiate&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td colspan=&quot;1&quot; rowspan=&quot;1&quot; valign=&quot;top&quot; width=&quot;226&quot;&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Sets trunking on and disables DTP. These will only become trunks with ports
in &lt;b&gt;on&lt;/b&gt; or &lt;b&gt;nonegotiate&lt;/b&gt; mode.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr valign=&quot;top&quot;&gt;
&lt;td colspan=&quot;1&quot; rowspan=&quot;1&quot; valign=&quot;top&quot; width=&quot;134&quot;&gt;
&lt;p&gt;COS = &lt;b&gt;off&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;IOS = &lt;b&gt;no switchport mode trunk&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td colspan=&quot;1&quot; rowspan=&quot;1&quot; valign=&quot;top&quot; width=&quot;226&quot;&gt;
&lt;p&gt;This option sets trunking and DTP capabilities off. This is the recommended
setting for any access port because it will prevent any dynamic establishments
of trunk links.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;&lt;br&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;note&quot;&gt;
&lt;p class=&quot;normaltitle&quot;&gt;&lt;b&gt;NOTE&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Cisco 2950 and 3500XL switches do not support DTP and are always in a mode
similar to &lt;b&gt;nonegotiate&lt;/b&gt;.&lt;b&gt; &lt;/b&gt;If you turn trunking on for one of these
devices, it will not negotiate with the other end of the link and requires that
the other link be configured to &lt;b&gt;on&lt;/b&gt; or &lt;b&gt;nonegotiate&lt;/b&gt;.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;p&gt;Specify the encapsulation method:&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;table border=&quot;2&quot; cellpadding=&quot;2&quot; cellspacing=&quot;2&quot;&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr valign=&quot;top&quot;&gt;
&lt;td colspan=&quot;1&quot; rowspan=&quot;1&quot; valign=&quot;top&quot; width=&quot;48&quot;&gt;
&lt;p&gt;COS&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td colspan=&quot;1&quot; rowspan=&quot;1&quot; valign=&quot;top&quot; width=&quot;289&quot;&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;set trunk &lt;/b&gt;&lt;i&gt;mod/port&lt;b&gt; &lt;/b&gt;&lt;/i&gt;[&lt;b&gt;negotiate &lt;/b&gt;|&lt;b&gt; isl &lt;/b&gt;|&lt;b&gt;
dot1Q&lt;/b&gt;] &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr valign=&quot;top&quot;&gt;
&lt;td colspan=&quot;1&quot; rowspan=&quot;1&quot; valign=&quot;top&quot; width=&quot;48&quot;&gt;
&lt;p&gt;IOS&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td colspan=&quot;1&quot; rowspan=&quot;1&quot; valign=&quot;top&quot; width=&quot;289&quot;&gt;
&lt;p&gt;(global)&lt;b&gt; interface &lt;/b&gt;&lt;i&gt;type mod/port&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;(interface) &lt;b&gt;switchport trunk encapsulation &lt;/b&gt;[&lt;b&gt;negotiate &lt;/b&gt;|&lt;b&gt; isl
&lt;/b&gt;|&lt;b&gt; dot1Q&lt;/b&gt;]&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;&lt;br&gt;
&lt;p&gt;The other option when choosing a trunk link is the
encapsulation method. For Layer 2 IOS switches, such as the 2900XL or the
3500XL, the default encapsulation method is &lt;b&gt;isl&lt;/b&gt;. You can change from the
default with the &lt;b&gt;switchport trunk encapsulation &lt;/b&gt;command. For COS switches
or integrated IOS switches, the default encapsulation is &lt;b&gt;negotiate&lt;/b&gt;. This
method signals between the trunked ports to choose an encapsulation method. (ISL
is preferred over 802.1Q.) The &lt;b&gt;negotiate &lt;/b&gt;option is valid for &lt;b&gt;auto
&lt;/b&gt;or &lt;b&gt;desirable &lt;/b&gt;trunking modes only. If you choose &lt;b&gt;on &lt;/b&gt;as the mode
or if you want to force a particular method or if the other side of the trunk
cannot negotiate the trunking type, you must choose the option &lt;b&gt;isl &lt;/b&gt;or
&lt;b&gt;dot1Q&lt;/b&gt; to specify the encapsulation method.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;note&quot;&gt;
&lt;p class=&quot;normaltitle&quot;&gt;&lt;b&gt;NOTE&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Not all switches allow you to negotiate a trunk encapsulation setting. The
2900XL and 3500XL trunks default to &lt;b&gt;isl&lt;/b&gt; and you must use the
&lt;b&gt;switchport trunk encapsulation&lt;/b&gt; command to change the encapsulation type.
The 2950 and some 4000 switches support only 802.1Q trunking and provide no
options for changing the trunk type.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;i&gt;(Optional) &lt;/i&gt;Specify the native VLAN:&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;table border=&quot;2&quot; cellpadding=&quot;2&quot; cellspacing=&quot;2&quot;&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr valign=&quot;top&quot;&gt;
&lt;td colspan=&quot;1&quot; rowspan=&quot;1&quot; valign=&quot;top&quot; width=&quot;48&quot;&gt;
&lt;p&gt;COS&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td colspan=&quot;1&quot; rowspan=&quot;1&quot; valign=&quot;top&quot; width=&quot;289&quot;&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;set vlan &lt;/b&gt;&lt;i&gt;number&lt;/i&gt;&lt;b&gt; &lt;/b&gt;&lt;i&gt;mod/port &lt;/i&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr valign=&quot;top&quot;&gt;
&lt;td colspan=&quot;1&quot; rowspan=&quot;1&quot; valign=&quot;top&quot; width=&quot;48&quot;&gt;
&lt;p&gt;IOS&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td colspan=&quot;1&quot; rowspan=&quot;1&quot; valign=&quot;top&quot; width=&quot;289&quot;&gt;
&lt;p&gt;(global)&lt;b&gt; interface &lt;/b&gt;&lt;i&gt;type mod/port&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;(interface) &lt;b&gt;switchport trunk native vlan &lt;/b&gt;&lt;i&gt;number&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;&lt;br&gt;
&lt;p&gt;For switches running 802.1Q as the trunking mechanism, the
native VLAN of each port on the trunk must match. By default all COS ports are
in VLAN 1; and the native VLAN on the IOS devices is also configured for VLAN 1,
so the native VLAN does match. If you choose to change the native VLAN, use the
&lt;b&gt;set vlan &lt;/b&gt;command for COS switches or the &lt;b&gt;switchport trunk native
vlan&lt;/b&gt; command for IOS switches to specify the native VLAN. Remember that the
native VLAN &lt;i&gt;must&lt;/i&gt; match on both sides of the trunk link for 802.1Q;
otherwise the link will not work. If there is a native VLAN mismatch,
&lt;i&gt;Spanning Tree Protocol&lt;/i&gt; (STP) places the port in a &lt;i&gt;port VLAN ID&lt;/i&gt;
(PVID) inconsistent state and will not forward on the link.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;note&quot;&gt;
&lt;p class=&quot;normaltitle&quot;&gt;&lt;b&gt;NOTE&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;i&gt;Cisco Discovery Protocol&lt;/i&gt; (CDP) version 2 passes native VLAN
information between Cisco switches. If you have a native VLAN mismatch, you will
see CDP error messages on the console output.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;h3&gt;Specifying VLANs to Trunk&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;p&gt;By default a trunk link carries all the VLANs that exist on the switch. This
is because all VLANs are active on a trunk link; and as long as the VLAN is in
the switch&#39;s local database, traffic for that VLAN is carried across the
trunks. You can elect to selectively remove and add VLANs from a trunk link. To
specify which VLANs are to be added or removed from a trunk link, use the
following commands.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;ol&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;i&gt; (Optional) &lt;/i&gt;Manually remove VLANs from a trunk link:&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;table border=&quot;2&quot; cellpadding=&quot;2&quot; cellspacing=&quot;2&quot;&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr valign=&quot;top&quot;&gt;
&lt;td colspan=&quot;1&quot; rowspan=&quot;1&quot; valign=&quot;top&quot; width=&quot;48&quot;&gt;
&lt;p&gt;COS&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td colspan=&quot;1&quot; rowspan=&quot;1&quot; valign=&quot;top&quot; width=&quot;289&quot;&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;tt&gt;&lt;b&gt;clear trunk &lt;/b&gt;&lt;i&gt;mod/port&lt;/i&gt;&lt;b&gt; &lt;/b&gt;&lt;i&gt;vlanlist &lt;/i&gt;&lt;/tt&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr valign=&quot;top&quot;&gt;
&lt;td colspan=&quot;1&quot; rowspan=&quot;1&quot; valign=&quot;top&quot; width=&quot;48&quot;&gt;
&lt;p&gt;IOS&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td colspan=&quot;1&quot; rowspan=&quot;1&quot; valign=&quot;top&quot; width=&quot;289&quot;&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;tt&gt;(global)&lt;b&gt; interface &lt;/b&gt;&lt;i&gt;type mod/port&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/tt&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;tt&gt;(interface) &lt;b&gt;switchport trunk allowed vlan remove
&lt;/b&gt;&lt;i&gt;vlanlist&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/tt&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;&lt;br&gt;
&lt;p&gt;By specifying VLANs in the &lt;i&gt;vlanlist&lt;/i&gt; field of this
command, the VLANs will not be allowed to travel across the trunk link until
they are added back to the trunk using the&amp;nbsp;command &lt;b&gt;set trunk
&lt;/b&gt;&lt;i&gt;mod/port vlanlist&lt;/i&gt;&lt;b&gt; &lt;/b&gt;or &lt;b&gt;switchport trunk allowed vlan add
&lt;/b&gt;&lt;i&gt;vlanlist&lt;/i&gt;.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;h3&gt;Verifying Trunks&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;ol&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;p&gt;After configuring a port for trunking, use one of the following commands to
verify the VLAN port assignments:&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;table border=&quot;2&quot; cellpadding=&quot;2&quot; cellspacing=&quot;2&quot;&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr valign=&quot;top&quot;&gt;
&lt;td colspan=&quot;1&quot; rowspan=&quot;1&quot; valign=&quot;top&quot; width=&quot;48&quot;&gt;
&lt;p&gt;COS&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td colspan=&quot;1&quot; rowspan=&quot;1&quot; valign=&quot;top&quot; width=&quot;289&quot;&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;tt&gt;&lt;b&gt;show trunk &lt;/b&gt;[&lt;i&gt;mod&lt;/i&gt;] [&lt;i&gt;mod/port&lt;/i&gt;] &lt;/tt&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr valign=&quot;top&quot;&gt;
&lt;td colspan=&quot;1&quot; rowspan=&quot;1&quot; valign=&quot;top&quot; width=&quot;48&quot;&gt;
&lt;p&gt;IOS&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td colspan=&quot;1&quot; rowspan=&quot;1&quot; valign=&quot;top&quot; width=&quot;289&quot;&gt;
&lt;p&gt;(&lt;tt&gt;privileged) &lt;b&gt;show interface &lt;/b&gt;&lt;i&gt;type mod/port&lt;/i&gt;
&lt;b&gt;switchport&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/tt&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;-OR-&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;tt&gt;&lt;b&gt;show interfaces trunk&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/tt&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;-OR-&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;tt&gt;&lt;b&gt;show interface &lt;/b&gt;[&lt;i&gt;mod&lt;/i&gt;] [&lt;i&gt;interface_id&lt;/i&gt;]&lt;b&gt;
trunk&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/tt&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;&lt;br&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;note&quot;&gt;
&lt;p class=&quot;normaltitle&quot;&gt;&lt;b&gt;NOTE&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;The commands &lt;b&gt;show interfaces trunk &lt;/b&gt;and &lt;b&gt;show interface
&lt;/b&gt;[&lt;i&gt;mod&lt;/i&gt;] [&lt;i&gt;interface_id&lt;/i&gt;] &lt;b&gt;trunk&lt;/b&gt; are not available on all
switches that run IOS.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;h3&gt;Feature Example&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;p&gt;In this example the switches Access_1 and Distribution_1 and Core_1 are
connected as shown in &lt;a href=&quot;javascript:popUp(&#39;/content/images/chap6_1587050439/elementLinks/06fig02.gif&#39;)&quot;&gt;Figure 6-2&lt;/a&gt;. 802.1Q trunking is configured in the on mode
between Access_1 and Distribution_1 switches. ISL is configured in desirable
mode on the Distribution_1 switch to the link connecting to the core. The core
is configured for autotrunking mode and encapsulation negotiate. The trunk
connected between the access switch is configured to only trunk for VLANs 5, 8,
and 10. The trunk between the Distribution_1 and Core_1 is configured to carry
only VLAN 1 and VLAN 10.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;javascript:popUp(&#39;/content/images/chap6_1587050439/elementLinks/06fig02.gif&#39;)&quot;&gt;&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.ciscopress.com/content/images/chap6_1587050439/elementLinks/th06fig02.gif&quot; alt=&quot;Figure 6-2&quot; align=&quot;left&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; width=&quot;100&quot; height=&quot;75&quot; hspace=&quot;5&quot;&gt;Figure 6-2&lt;/a&gt;	 Network Diagram for Trunk Configuration on Access_1,
Distribution_1, and Core_1&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
 
&lt;p&gt;An example of the Catalyst OS configuration for Distribution_1 follows:&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;pre&gt;Distribution_1 (enable)&amp;gt;&lt;b&gt;clear trunk 1/1 2-1001&lt;/b&gt;&lt;br&gt;Distribution_1 (enable)&amp;gt;set trunk 1/1 desirable isl 10&lt;br&gt;Distribution_1 (enable)&amp;gt;clear trunk 2/1 2-1001&lt;br&gt;Distribution_1 (enable)&amp;gt;&lt;b&gt;set trunk 2/1 on dot1q 5,8,10&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;p&gt;An example of the Catalyst OS configuration for Core_1 follows:&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;pre&gt;Core_1 (enable)&amp;gt;&lt;b&gt;clear trunk 1/1 2-1001&lt;/b&gt;&lt;br&gt;Core_1 (enable)&amp;gt;&lt;b&gt;set trunk 1/1 10&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;p&gt;An example of the Supervisor IOS configuration for Core_1 follows:&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;pre&gt;Core_1(config)#&lt;b&gt;interface gigabitethernet 1/1&lt;/b&gt;&lt;br&gt;Core_1(config-if)#switchport encapsulation negotiate&lt;br&gt;Core_1(config-if)#switchport mode dynamic auto&lt;br&gt;Core_1(config-if)#switchport trunk allowed vlan remove 2-1001&lt;br&gt;Core_1(config-if)#switchport trunk allowed vlan add 10&lt;br&gt;Core_1 (config-if)#end&lt;br&gt;Core_1#&lt;b&gt;copy running-config startup-config&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;p&gt;An example of the Layer 2 IOS configuration for Access_1 follows:&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;pre&gt;Access_1 (config)#&lt;b&gt;interface gigabitethernet 0/1&lt;/b&gt;&lt;br&gt;Access_1 (config-if)#switchport mode trunk&lt;br&gt;Access_1 (config-if)#switchport trunk encapsulation dot1q&lt;br&gt;Access_1 (config-if)#switchport trunk allowed vlan remove 2-1001&lt;br&gt;Access_1 (config-if)#switchport trunk allowed vlan add 5,8,10&lt;br&gt;Access_1 (config-if)#end&lt;br&gt;Access_1#&lt;b&gt;copy running-config startup-config&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;&lt;/b&gt;provided courtesy of &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.ciscopress.com&quot;&gt;Cisco Press&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;br&gt;&lt;/pre&gt;</description>
    
    <category domain="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/CCNADocs">CCNA Docs</category>
    
    
    <ent:cloud ent:href="">
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="Trunking" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=Trunking">Trunking</ent:topic>
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="VLAN" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=VLAN">VLAN</ent:topic>
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="Switcing" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=Switcing">Switcing</ent:topic>
    
    </ent:cloud>
    
    
    
  </item>
  
  <item>
    <dc:creator>sparky</dc:creator>
    <title>VLAN Trunk Protocol - VTP</title>
    <link>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/2/13/4091576.html</link>
    <guid>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/2/13/4091576.html</guid>
    <pubDate>Fri, 13 Feb 2009 13:59:00 +0000</pubDate>
    <description>&lt;i&gt;Understanding
		  How VTP Version 3 Works&lt;/i&gt; 
		&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/switches/lan/catalyst6500/catos/8.x/configuration/guide/vtp.html#wp1041982&quot;&gt;&lt;i&gt;Interaction
		  with VTP Version 1 and VTP Version 2&lt;/i&gt;
&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;i&gt; (VTP Version
		  3)&lt;/i&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/switches/lan/catalyst6500/catos/8.x/configuration/guide/vtp.html#wp1017196&quot;&gt;
&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;br&gt;&lt;font style=&quot;font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot; size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&lt;span class=&quot;content&quot;&gt;&lt;h2&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;4&quot;&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;intro&quot;&gt;Introduction&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/h2&gt; 
 
  &lt;p&gt;VLAN Trunk Protocol (VTP) reduces administration in a switched network.
	 When you configure a new VLAN on one VTP server, the VLAN is distributed
	 through all switches in the domain. This reduces the need to configure the same
	 VLAN everywhere. VTP is a Cisco-proprietary protocol that is available on most
	 of the Cisco Catalyst series products.&lt;/p&gt; 
   
	 &lt;p&gt;
Note:&amp;nbsp;This document does not cover VTP Version 3. VTP Version 3 differs
		from VTP Version 1 (V1) and Version 2 (V2), and it is only available on
		Catalyst OS (CatOS) 8.1(1) or later. VTP Version 3 incorporates many changes
		from VTP V1 and V2. Make certain that you understand the differences between
		VTP Version 3 and earlier versions before you alter your network configuration.
		Refer to one of these sections of
		&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/switches/lan/catalyst6500/catos/8.x/configuration/guide/vtp.html&quot;&gt;Configuring
		VTP&lt;/a&gt; for more information:&lt;/p&gt; &lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt; 
		&lt;p&gt;
&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/switches/lan/catalyst6500/catos/8.x/configuration/guide/vtp.html#wp1017196&quot;&gt;
&lt;i&gt;Understanding
		  How VTP Version 3 Works&lt;/i&gt;
&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt; 
		&lt;p&gt;
&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/switches/lan/catalyst6500/catos/8.x/configuration/guide/vtp.html#wp1041982&quot;&gt;
&lt;i&gt;Interaction
		  with VTP Version 1 and VTP Version 2&lt;/i&gt;
&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;i&gt; (VTP Version
		  3)&lt;/i&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt; 
   
  &lt;h2&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;pre&quot;&gt;Prerequisites&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;/h2&gt; 
&lt;h3&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;req&quot;&gt;Requirements&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;/h3&gt; 
  &lt;p&gt;There are no specific requirements for this document.&lt;/p&gt; 
 
&lt;h3&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;hw&quot;&gt;Components Used&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;/h3&gt; 
  &lt;p&gt;This document is not restricted to specific software or hardware
	 versions.&lt;/p&gt; 
 
&lt;h3&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;conv&quot;&gt;Conventions&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;/h3&gt; 
  &lt;p&gt;Refer to
	 &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/en/US/tech/tk801/tk36/technologies_tech_note09186a0080121ac5.shtml&quot;&gt;Cisco
	 Technical Tips Conventions&lt;/a&gt; for more information on document
	 conventions.&lt;/p&gt; 
 &lt;h2&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;ustand&quot;&gt;Understand VTP&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;vtp_msg&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;h2&gt;&lt;font size=&quot;3&quot;&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;vtp_msg&quot;&gt;VTP Messages in Detail&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/h2&gt; 
   
&lt;h3&gt;
&lt;/h3&gt; 
 
  &lt;p&gt;VTP packets are sent in either Inter-Switch Link (ISL) frames or in
	 IEEE 802.1Q (dot1q) frames. These packets are sent to the destination MAC
	 address 01-00-0C-CC-CC-CC with a logical link control (LLC) code of Subnetwork
	 Access Protocol (SNAP) (AAAA) and a type of 2003 (in the SNAP header). This is
	 the format of a VTP packet that is encapsulated in ISL
	 frames:&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;
&lt;img alt=&quot;21b.gif&quot; src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/image/gif/paws/10558/21b.gif&quot; usemap=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot;&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
  
  &lt;p&gt;Of course, you can have a VTP packet inside 802.1Q frames. In that
	 case, the ISL header and cyclic redundancy check (CRC) is replaced by dot1q
	 tagging.&lt;/p&gt; 
  &lt;p&gt;Now consider the detail of a VTP packet. The format of the VTP header
	 can vary, based on the type of VTP message. But, all VTP packets contain these
	 fields in the header:&lt;/p&gt; &lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt; 
	 &lt;p&gt;VTP protocol version: 1, 2, or 3&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt; 
	 &lt;p&gt;VTP message types:&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt; 
		&lt;p&gt;Summary advertisements&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt; 
		&lt;p&gt;Subset advertisement&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt; 
		&lt;p&gt;Advertisement requests&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt; 
		&lt;p&gt;VTP join messages&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt; 
	 &lt;p&gt;Management domain length&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt; 
	 &lt;p&gt;Management domain name&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt; 
 
&lt;h4&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;vtp_msg_cfg&quot;&gt;Configuration Revision Number&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;/h4&gt; 
  &lt;p&gt;The configuration revision number is a 32-bit number that indicates the
	 level of revision for a VTP packet. Each VTP device tracks the VTP
	 configuration revision number that is assigned to it. Most of the VTP packets
	 contain the VTP configuration revision number of the sender.&lt;/p&gt; 
  &lt;p&gt;This information is used in order to determine whether the received
	 information is more recent than the current version. Each time that you make a
	 VLAN change in a VTP device, the configuration revision is incremented by one.
	 In order to reset the configuration revision of a switch, change the VTP domain
	 name, and then change the name back to the original name.&lt;/p&gt; 
 
&lt;h4&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;vtp_msg_sum&quot;&gt;Summary Advertisements&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;/h4&gt; 
  &lt;p&gt;By default, Catalyst switches issue summary advertisements in
	 five-minute increments. Summary advertisements inform adjacent Catalysts of the
	 current VTP domain name and the configuration revision number.&lt;/p&gt; 
  &lt;p&gt;When the switch receives a summary advertisement packet, the switch
	 compares the VTP domain name to its own VTP domain name. If the name is
	 different, the switch simply ignores the packet. If the name is the same, the
	 switch then compares the configuration revision to its own revision. If its own
	 configuration revision is higher or equal, the packet is ignored. If it is
	 lower, an advertisement request is sent.&lt;/p&gt; 
  &lt;p&gt;
&lt;img alt=&quot;21c.gif&quot; src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/image/gif/paws/10558/21c.gif&quot; usemap=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot;&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
  
  &lt;p&gt;This list clarifies what the fields means in the summary advertisement
	 packet:&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt; 
	 &lt;p&gt;The Followers field indicates that this packet is followed by a
		Subset Advertisement packet.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt; 
	 &lt;p&gt;The Updater Identity is the IP address of the switch that is the last
		to have incremented the configuration revision.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt; 
	 &lt;p&gt;The Update Timestamp is the date and time of the last increment of
		the configuration revision.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt; 
	 &lt;p&gt;Message Digest 5 (MD5) carries the VTP password, if MD5 is configured
		and used to authenticate the validation of a VTP
		update.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt; 
 
&lt;h4&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;vtp_msg_subset&quot;&gt;Subset Advertisements&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;/h4&gt; 
  &lt;p&gt;When you add, delete, or change a VLAN in a Catalyst, the server
	 Catalyst where the changes are made increments the configuration revision and
	 issues a summary advertisement. One or several subset advertisements follow the
	 summary advertisement. A subset advertisement contains a list of VLAN
	 information. If there are several VLANs, more than one subset advertisement can
	 be required in order to advertise all the VLANs.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;
&lt;img alt=&quot;21d.gif&quot; src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/image/gif/paws/10558/21d.gif&quot; usemap=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot;&gt;
&lt;/p&gt; 
  &lt;p&gt;This formatted example shows that each VLAN information field contains
	 information for a different VLAN. It is ordered so that lowered-valued ISL VLAN
	 IDs occur first:&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;
&lt;img alt=&quot;21e.gif&quot; src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/image/gif/paws/10558/21e.gif&quot; usemap=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot;&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
  
  &lt;p&gt;Most of the fields in this packet are easy to understand. These are two
	 clarifications:&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt; 
	 &lt;p&gt;
Code—The format for this is 0x02 for subset
		advertisement.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt; 
	 &lt;p&gt;
Sequence number—This is the sequence of the packet
		in the stream of packets that follow a summary advertisement. The sequence
		starts with 1.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt; 
 
&lt;h4&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;vtp_msg_ad&quot;&gt;Advertisement Requests&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;/h4&gt; 
  &lt;p&gt;A switch needs a VTP advertisement request in these situations:&lt;/p&gt; 
  &lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt; 
	 &lt;p&gt;The switch has been reset.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt; 
	 &lt;p&gt;The VTP domain name has been changed.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt; 
	 &lt;p&gt;The switch has received a VTP summary advertisement with a higher
		configuration revision than its own.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt; 
  &lt;p&gt;Upon receipt of an advertisement request, a VTP device sends a summary
	 advertisement. One or more subset advertisements follow the summary
	 advertisement. This is an example:&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;
&lt;img alt=&quot;21f.gif&quot; src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/image/gif/paws/10558/21f.gif&quot; usemap=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot;&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
  &lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt; 
	 &lt;p&gt;
Code—The format for this is 0x03 for an
		advertisement request.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt; 
	 &lt;p&gt;
Start-Value—This is used in cases in which there are
		several subset advertisements. If the first (&lt;i&gt;n&lt;/i&gt;) subset
		advertisement has been received and the subsequent one
		(&lt;i&gt;n&lt;/i&gt;+1) has not been received, the Catalyst only requests
		advertisements from the (&lt;i&gt;n&lt;/i&gt;+1)th
		one.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt; 
 
&lt;h2&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;4&quot;&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;other_vtp_options&quot;&gt;Other VTP Options&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/h2&gt; 
&lt;h3&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;vtp_modes&quot;&gt;VTP Modes&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;/h3&gt; 
  &lt;p&gt;You can configure a switch to operate in any one of these VTP
	 modes:&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt; 
	 &lt;p&gt;Server—In VTP server mode, you can create, modify, and delete VLANs
		and specify other configuration parameters, such as VTP version and VTP
		pruning, for the entire VTP domain. VTP servers advertise their VLAN
		configuration to other switches in the same VTP domain and synchronize their
		VLAN configuration with other switches based on advertisements received over
		trunk links. VTP server is the default mode. &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt; 
	 &lt;p&gt;Client—VTP clients behave the same way as VTP servers, but you cannot
		create, change, or delete VLANs on a VTP client.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt; 
	 &lt;p&gt;Transparent—VTP transparent switches do not participate in VTP. A VTP
		transparent switch does not advertise its VLAN configuration and does not
		synchronize its VLAN configuration based on received advertisements, but
		transparent switches do forward VTP advertisements that they receive out their
		trunk ports in VTP Version 2.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt; 
	 &lt;p&gt;Off (configurable only in CatOS switches)—In the three described
		modes, VTP advertisements are received and transmitted as soon as the switch
		enters the management domain state. In the VTP off mode, switches behave the
		same as in VTP transparent mode with the exception that VTP advertisements are
		not forwarded.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt; 
 
&lt;h3&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;vtp_v2&quot;&gt;VTP V2&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;/h3&gt; 
  &lt;p&gt;VTP V2 is not much different than VTP V1. The major difference is that
	 VTP V2 introduces support for Token Ring VLANs. If you use Token Ring VLANs,
	 you must enable VTP V2. Otherwise, there is no reason to use VTP V2.&lt;/p&gt; 
 
&lt;h3&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;vtp_pw&quot;&gt;VTP Password&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;/h3&gt; 
  &lt;p&gt;If you configure a password for VTP, you must configure the password on
	 all switches in the VTP domain. The password must be the same password on all
	 those switches. The VTP password that you configure is translated by algorithm
	 into a 16-byte word (MD5 value) that is carried in all summary-advertisement
	 VTP packets.&lt;/p&gt; 
 
&lt;h3&gt;
&lt;a name=&quot;vtp_pruning&quot;&gt;VTP Pruning&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;/h3&gt; 
  &lt;p&gt;VTP ensures that all switches in the VTP domain are aware of all VLANs.
	 However, there are occasions when VTP can create unnecessary traffic. All
	 unknown unicasts and broadcasts in a VLAN are flooded over the entire VLAN. All
	 switches in the network receive all broadcasts, even in situations in which few
	 users are connected in that VLAN. VTP pruning is a feature that you use in
	 order to eliminate or &lt;i&gt;prune&lt;/i&gt; this unnecessary
	 traffic.&lt;/p&gt; 
   
	 Broadcast traffic in a switched network without
		pruning
&lt;p&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;
&lt;img alt=&quot;21g.gif&quot; src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/image/gif/paws/10558/21g.gif&quot; usemap=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot;&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
  
  &lt;p&gt;This figure shows a switched network without VTP pruning enabled. Port
	 1 on Switch A and Port 2 on Switch D are assigned to the Red VLAN. If a
	 broadcast is sent from the host connected to Switch A, Switch A floods the
	 broadcast and every switch in the network receives it, even though Switches C,
	 E, and F have no ports in the Red VLAN.&lt;/p&gt; 
	 Broadcast traffic in a switched network with
		pruning
&lt;p&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;
&lt;img alt=&quot;21h.gif&quot; src=&quot;http://www.cisco.com/image/gif/paws/10558/21h.gif&quot; usemap=&quot;&quot; border=&quot;0&quot;&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
  
  &lt;p&gt;This figure shows the same switched network with VTP pruning enabled.
	 The broadcast traffic from Switch A is not forwarded to Switches C, E, and F
	 because traffic for the Red VLAN has been pruned on the links shown (Port 5 on
	 Switch B and Port 4 on Switch D). &lt;/p&gt; 
  &lt;p&gt;When VTP pruning is enabled on a VTP server, pruning is enabled for the
	 entire management domain. Making VLANs pruning-eligible or pruning-ineligible
	 affects pruning eligibility for those VLANs on that trunk only (not on all
	 switches in the VTP domain). VTP pruning takes effect several seconds after you
	 enable it. VTP pruning does not prune traffic from VLANs that are
	 pruning-ineligible. VLAN 1 and VLANs 1002 to 1005 are always
	 pruning-ineligible; traffic from these VLANs cannot be pruned. Extended-range
	 VLANs (VLAN IDs greater than 1005) are also pruning-ineligible.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;4&quot;&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;using_vtp_net&quot;&gt;Use VTP in a Network&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/h2&gt; 
 
  &lt;p&gt;By default, all switches are configured to be VTP servers. This
	 configuration is suitable for small-scale networks in which the size of the
	 VLAN information is small and the information is easily stored in all switches
	 (in NVRAM). In a large network, the network administrator must make a judgment
	 call at some point, when the NVRAM storage that is necessary is wasteful
	 because it is duplicated on every switch. At this point, the network
	 administrator must choose a few well-equipped switches and keep them as VTP
	 servers. Everything else that participates in VTP can be turned into a client.
	 The number of VTP servers should be chosen in order to provide the degree of
	 redundancy that is desired in the network.&lt;/p&gt; 
  &lt;p&gt;
Notes:
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt; 
	 &lt;p&gt;If a switch is configured as a VTP server without a VTP domain name,
		you cannot configure a VLAN on the switch.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt; 
	 &lt;p&gt;If a new Catalyst is attached in the border of two VTP domains, the
		new Catalyst keeps the domain name of the first switch that sends it a summary
		advertisement. The only way to attach this switch to another VTP domain is to
		manually set a different VTP domain name.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt; 
	 &lt;p&gt;Dynamic Trunking Protocol (DTP) sends the VTP domain name in a DTP
		packet. Therefore, if you have two ends of a link that belong to different VTP
		domains, the trunk does not come up if you use DTP. In this special case, you
		must configure the trunk mode as on or
		nonegotiate, on both sides, in order to allow
		the trunk to come up without DTP negotiation agreement.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt; 
	 &lt;p&gt;If the domain has a single VTP server and it crashes, the best and
		easiest way to restore the operation is to change any of the VTP clients in
		that domain to a VTP server. The configuration revision is still the same in
		the rest of the clients, even if the server crashes. Therefore, VTP works
		properly in the domain.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;&lt;br&gt;&lt;h2&gt;
&lt;font size=&quot;4&quot;&gt;&lt;a name=&quot;conclusion&quot;&gt;Conclusion&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/font&gt;
&lt;/h2&gt; 
 
  &lt;p&gt;There are some disadvantages to the use of VTP. You must balance the
	 ease of VTP administration against the inherent risk of a large STP domain and
	 the potential instability and risks of STP. The greatest risk is an STP loop
	 through the entire campus. When you use VTP, there are two things to which you
	 must pay close attention:&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt; 
	 &lt;p&gt;Remember the configuration revision and how to reset it each time
		that you insert a new switch in your network so that you do not bring down the
		entire network.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt; 
	 &lt;p&gt;Avoid as much as possible to have a VLAN that spans the entire
		network.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/font&gt;</description>
    
    <category domain="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/CCNADocs">CCNA Docs</category>
    
    
    <ent:cloud ent:href="">
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="VLAN" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=VLAN">VLAN</ent:topic>
    
    </ent:cloud>
    
    
    
  </item>
  
  <item>
    <dc:creator>sparky</dc:creator>
    <title>VLANs</title>
    <link>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/2/10/4087665.html</link>
    <guid>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/2/10/4087665.html</guid>
    <pubDate>Tue, 10 Feb 2009 09:46:00 +0000</pubDate>
    <description>&lt;h2&gt; 
&lt;a name=&quot;Introduction&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;Introduction&lt;/h2&gt;

&lt;p&gt;A Local Area Network (LAN) was originally defined as a network of
computers located within the same area. Today, Local Area Networks are
defined as a single broadcast domain. This means that if a user
broadcasts information on his/her LAN, the broadcast will be received
by every other user on the LAN. Broadcasts are prevented from leaving a
LAN by using a router. The disadvantage of this method is routers
usually take more time to process incoming data compared to a bridge or
a switch. More importantly, the formation of broadcast domains depends
on the physical connection of the devices in the network. Virtual Local
Area Networks (VLAN&#39;s) were developed as an alternative solution to
using routers to contain broadcast traffic. &lt;/p&gt;

&lt;p&gt;In Section 2, we define VLAN&#39;s and examine the difference between a
LAN and a VLAN. This is followed by a discussion on the advantages
VLAN&#39;s introduce to a network in Section 3. Finally, we explain how
VLAN&#39;s work based on the current draft standards in Section 4.&lt;/p&gt;



&lt;hr width=&quot;100%&quot;&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;2.0 
&lt;a name=&quot;WhatVLAN&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;What are VLAN&#39;s?&lt;/h2&gt;

&lt;p&gt;In a traditional LAN, workstations are connected to each other by
means of a hub or a repeater. These devices propagate any incoming data
throughout the network. However, if two people attempt to send
information at the same time, a collision will occur and all the
transmitted data will be lost. Once the collision has occurred, it will
continue to be propagated throughout the network by hubs and repeaters.
The original information will therefore need to be resent after waiting
for the collision to be resolved, thereby incurring a significant
wastage of time and resources. To prevent collisions from traveling
through all the workstations in the network, a bridge or a switch can
be used. These devices will not forward collisions, but will allow
broadcasts (to every user in the network) and multicasts (to a
pre-specified group of users) to pass through. A router may be used to
prevent broadcasts and multicasts from traveling through the network.&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;p&gt;The workstations, hubs, and repeaters together form a LAN segment. A
LAN segment is also known as a collision domain since collisions remain
within the segment. The area within which broadcasts and multicasts are
confined is called a broadcast domain or LAN. Thus a LAN can consist of
one or more LAN segments. Defining broadcast and collision domains in a
LAN depends on how the workstations, hubs, switches, and routers are
physically connected together. This means that everyone on a LAN must
be located in the same area (see &lt;i&gt;Figure&lt;/i&gt;1).&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;center&gt;

&lt;p&gt;
&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cse.wustl.edu/%7Ejain/cis788-97/ftp/virtual_lans/pic1.gif&quot; alt=&quot;pic1.gif&quot; width=&quot;726&quot; height=&quot;474&quot;&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/center&gt;
&lt;center&gt;

&lt;p&gt;&lt;i&gt;Figure &lt;/i&gt;1: Physical view of a LAN.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/center&gt;

&lt;p&gt;VLAN&#39;s allow a network manager to logically segment a LAN into different broadcast domains (see &lt;i&gt;Figure&lt;/i&gt;2).
Since this is a logical segmentation and not a physical one,
workstations do not have to be physically located together. Users on
different floors of the same building, or even in different buildings
can now belong to the same LAN. &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;center&gt;

&lt;p&gt;
&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cse.wustl.edu/%7Ejain/cis788-97/ftp/virtual_lans/pic2.gif&quot; alt=&quot;pic2.gif&quot; width=&quot;684&quot; height=&quot;470&quot;&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/center&gt;
&lt;center&gt;

&lt;p&gt;Physical View&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/center&gt;
&lt;center&gt;

&lt;p&gt;
&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cse.wustl.edu/%7Ejain/cis788-97/ftp/virtual_lans/pic2supp.gif&quot; alt=&quot;pic2supp.gif&quot; width=&quot;370&quot; height=&quot;148&quot;&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/center&gt;
&lt;center&gt;

&lt;p&gt;Logical View&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/center&gt;
&lt;center&gt;

&lt;p&gt;&lt;i&gt;Figure &lt;/i&gt;2: Physical and logical view of a VLAN.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/center&gt;

&lt;p&gt;VLAN&#39;s also allow broadcast domains to be defined without using
routers. Bridging software is used instead to define which workstations
are to be included in the broadcast domain. Routers would only have to
be used to communicate between two VLAN&#39;s [
&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.cse.wustl.edu/%7Ejain/cis788-97/ftp/virtual_lans/#3%29&quot;&gt;Hein et al&lt;/a&gt;]. &lt;/p&gt;



&lt;p&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;&lt;hr width=&quot;100%&quot;&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;3.0 
&lt;a name=&quot;WhyVLAN&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;Why use VLAN&#39;s?&lt;/h2&gt;

&lt;p&gt;VLAN&#39;s offer a number of advantages over traditional LAN&#39;s. They are: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;1) Performance &lt;/b&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;In networks where traffic consists of a high percentage of
broadcasts and multicasts, VLAN&#39;s can reduce the need to send such
traffic to unnecessary destinations. For example, in a broadcast domain
consisting of 10 users, if the broadcast traffic is intended only for 5
of the users, then placing those 5 users on a separate VLAN can reduce
traffic [
&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.cse.wustl.edu/%7Ejain/cis788-97/ftp/virtual_lans/#1%29&quot;&gt;Passmore et al (3Com report)&lt;/a&gt;]. &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Compared to switches, routers require more processing of incoming
traffic. As the volume of traffic passing through the routers
increases, so does the latency in the routers, which results in reduced
performance. The use of VLAN&#39;s reduces the number of routers needed,
since VLAN&#39;s create broadcast domains using switches instead of
routers. &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;2) Formation of Virtual Workgroups &lt;/b&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Nowadays, it is common to find cross-functional product development
teams with members from different departments such as marketing, sales,
accounting, and research. These workgroups are usually formed for a
short period of time. During this period, communication between members
of the workgroup will be high. To contain broadcasts and multicasts
within the workgroup, a VLAN can be set up for them. With VLAN&#39;s it is
easier to place members of a workgroup together. Without VLAN&#39;s, the
only way this would be possible is to physically move all the members
of the workgroup closer together. &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;However, virtual workgroups do not come without problems. Consider
the situation where one user of the workgroup is on the fourth floor of
a building, and the other workgroup members are on the second floor.
Resources such as a printer would be located on the second floor, which
would be inconvenient for the lone fourth floor user. &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Another problem with setting up virtual workgroups is the
implementation of centralized server farms, which are essentially
collections of servers and major resources for operating a network at a
central location. The advantages here are numerous, since it is more
efficient and cost-effective to provide better security, uninterrupted
power supply, consolidated backup, and a proper operating environment
in a single area than if the major resources were scattered in a
building. Centralized server farms can cause problems when setting up
virtual workgroups if servers cannot be placed on more than one VLAN.
In such a case, the server would be placed on a single VLAN and all
other VLAN&#39;s trying to access the server would have to go through a
router; this can reduce performance [Netreference Inc. article]. &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;3) Simplified Administration &lt;/b&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Seventy percent of network costs are a result of adds, moves, and changes of users in the network [
&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.cse.wustl.edu/%7Ejain/cis788-97/ftp/virtual_lans/#5%29&quot;&gt;Buerger&lt;/a&gt;].
Every time a user is moved in a LAN, recabling, new station addressing,
and reconfiguration of hubs and routers becomes necessary. Some of
these tasks can be simplified with the use of VLAN&#39;s. If a user is
moved within a VLAN, reconfiguration of routers is unnecessary. In
addition, depending on the type of VLAN, other administrative work can
be reduced or eliminated [
&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.cse.wustl.edu/%7Ejain/cis788-97/ftp/virtual_lans/#5%29&quot;&gt;Cisco white paper&lt;/a&gt;].
However the full power of VLAN&#39;s will only really be felt when good
management tools are created which can allow network managers to drag
and drop users into different VLAN&#39;s or to set up aliases. &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Despite this saving, VLAN&#39;s add a layer of administrative
complexity, since it now becomes necessary to manage virtual workgroups
[
&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.cse.wustl.edu/%7Ejain/cis788-97/ftp/virtual_lans/#1%29&quot;&gt;Passmore et al (3Com report)&lt;/a&gt;]. &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;4) Reduced Cost &lt;/b&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;VLAN&#39;s can be used to create broadcast domains which eliminate the need for expensive routers. &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;5) Security &lt;/b&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Periodically, sensitive data may be broadcast on a network. In such
cases, placing only those users who can have access to that data on a
VLAN can reduce the chances of an outsider gaining access to the data.
VLAN&#39;s can also be used to control broadcast domains, set up firewalls,
restrict access, and inform the network manager of an intrusion [
&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.cse.wustl.edu/%7Ejain/cis788-97/ftp/virtual_lans/#1%29&quot;&gt;Passmore et al (3Com report)&lt;/a&gt;].&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;




&lt;p&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;&lt;hr width=&quot;100%&quot;&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;4.0 
&lt;a name=&quot;HowVLAN&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;How VLAN&#39;s work&lt;/h2&gt;

&lt;p&gt;When a LAN bridge receives data from a workstation, it tags the data
with a VLAN identifier indicating the VLAN from which the data came.
This is called explicit tagging. It is also possible to determine to
which VLAN the data received belongs using implicit tagging. In
implicit tagging the data is not tagged, but the VLAN from which the
data came is determined based on other information like the port on
which the data arrived. Tagging can be based on the port from which it
came, the source Media Access Control (MAC) field, the source network
address, or some other field or combination of fields. VLAN&#39;s are
classified based on the method used. To be able to do the tagging of
data using any of the methods, the bridge would have to keep an updated
database containing a mapping between VLAN&#39;s and whichever field is
used for tagging. For example, if tagging is by port, the database
should indicate which ports belong to which VLAN. This database is
called a filtering database. Bridges would have to be able to maintain
this database and also to make sure that all the bridges on the LAN
have the same information in each of their databases. The bridge
determines where the data is to go next based on normal LAN operations.
Once the bridge determines where the data is to go, it now needs to
determine whether the VLAN identifier should be added to the data and
sent. If the data is to go to a device that knows about VLAN
implementation (VLAN-aware), the VLAN identifier is added to the data.
If it is to go to a device that has no knowledge of VLAN implementation
(VLAN-unaware), the bridge sends the data without the VLAN identifier. &lt;/p&gt;

&lt;p&gt;In order to understand how VLAN&#39;s work, we need to look at the types
of VLAN&#39;s, the types of connections between devices on VLAN&#39;s, the
filtering database which is used to send traffic to the correct VLAN,
and tagging, a process used to identify the VLAN originating the data.&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;VLAN Standard: IEEE 802.1Q Draft Standard &lt;/b&gt;&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;p&gt;There has been a recent move towards building a set of standards for
VLAN products. The Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
(IEEE) is currently working on a draft standard 802.1Q for VLAN&#39;s. Up
to this point, products have been proprietary, implying that anyone
wanting to install VLAN&#39;s would have to purchase all products from the
same vendor. Once the standards have been written and vendors create
products based on these standards, users will no longer be confined to
purchasing products from a single vendor. The major vendors have
supported these standards and are planning on releasing products based
on them. It is anticipated that these standards will be ratified later
this year. &lt;/p&gt;


&lt;h3&gt;4.1 
&lt;a name=&quot;Types&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;Types of VLAN&#39;s&lt;/h3&gt;

&lt;p&gt;VLAN membership can be classified by port, MAC address, and protocol type. &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;1) Layer 1 VLAN: Membership by Port &lt;/b&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Membership in a VLAN can be defined based on the ports that belong
to the VLAN. For example, in a bridge with four ports, ports 1, 2, and
4 belong to VLAN 1 and port 3 belongs to VLAN 2 (see &lt;i&gt;Figure&lt;/i&gt;3). &lt;/p&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;

&lt;center&gt;
&lt;table bgcolor=&quot;#ffffff&quot; border=&quot;1&quot; cellpadding=&quot;10&quot;&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td&gt;Port&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td&gt;VLAN&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr align=&quot;center&quot; valign=&quot;middle&quot;&gt;
&lt;td align=&quot;center&quot; valign=&quot;middle&quot;&gt;1&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td&gt;1&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr align=&quot;center&quot; valign=&quot;middle&quot;&gt;
&lt;td&gt;2&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td&gt;1&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr align=&quot;center&quot; valign=&quot;middle&quot;&gt;
&lt;td&gt;3&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td&gt;2&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr align=&quot;center&quot; valign=&quot;middle&quot;&gt;
&lt;td&gt;4&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td&gt;1&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;/center&gt;
&lt;center&gt;

&lt;p&gt;&lt;i&gt;Figure&lt;/i&gt;3: Assignment of ports to different VLAN&#39;s.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/center&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;&lt;p&gt;The main disadvantage of this method is that it does not allow for
user mobility. If a user moves to a different location away from the
assigned bridge, the network manager must reconfigure the VLAN. &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;2) Layer 2 VLAN: Membership by MAC Address &lt;/b&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Here, membership in a VLAN is based on the MAC address of the
workstation. The switch tracks the MAC addresses which belong to each
VLAN (see &lt;i&gt;Figure&lt;/i&gt;4). Since MAC addresses form a part of the
workstation&#39;s network interface card, when a workstation is moved, no
reconfiguration is needed to allow the workstation to remain in the
same VLAN. This is unlike Layer 1 VLAN&#39;s where membership tables must
be reconfigured. &lt;/p&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;

&lt;center&gt;
&lt;table bgcolor=&quot;#ffffff&quot; border=&quot;1&quot; cellpadding=&quot;10&quot;&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td&gt;MAC Address&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td&gt;VLAN&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr align=&quot;center&quot; valign=&quot;middle&quot;&gt;
&lt;td align=&quot;center&quot; valign=&quot;middle&quot;&gt;1212354145121&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td&gt;1&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr align=&quot;center&quot; valign=&quot;middle&quot;&gt;
&lt;td&gt;2389234873743&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td&gt;2&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr align=&quot;center&quot; valign=&quot;middle&quot;&gt;
&lt;td&gt;3045834758445&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td&gt;2&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr align=&quot;center&quot; valign=&quot;middle&quot;&gt;
&lt;td&gt;5483573475843&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td&gt;1&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;/center&gt;
&lt;center&gt;

&lt;p&gt;&lt;i&gt;Figure&lt;/i&gt;4: Assignment of MAC addresses to different VLAN&#39;s.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/center&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;&lt;p&gt;The main problem with this method is that VLAN membership must be
assigned initially. In networks with thousands of users, this is no
easy task. Also, in environments where notebook PC&#39;s are used, the MAC
address is associated with the docking station and not with the
notebook PC. Consequently, when a notebook PC is moved to a different
docking station, its VLAN membership must be reconfigured.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;3) Layer 2 VLAN: Membership by Protocol Type &lt;/b&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;VLAN membership for Layer 2 VLAN&#39;s can also be based on the protocol type field found in the Layer 2 header (see &lt;i&gt;Figure&lt;/i&gt;5). &lt;/p&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;

&lt;center&gt;
&lt;table bgcolor=&quot;#ffffff&quot; border=&quot;1&quot; cellpadding=&quot;10&quot;&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td&gt;Protocol&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td&gt;VLAN&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr align=&quot;center&quot; valign=&quot;middle&quot;&gt;
&lt;td align=&quot;center&quot; valign=&quot;middle&quot;&gt;IP&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td&gt;1&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr align=&quot;center&quot; valign=&quot;middle&quot;&gt;
&lt;td&gt;IPX&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td&gt;2&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;/center&gt;
&lt;center&gt;

&lt;p&gt;&lt;i&gt;Figure&lt;/i&gt;5: Assignment of protocols to different VLAN&#39;s.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/center&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;4) Layer 3 VLAN: Membership by IP Subnet Address&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Membership is based on the Layer 3 header. The network IP subnet address can be used to classify VLAN membership (see &lt;i&gt;Figure 6&lt;/i&gt;).&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;

&lt;center&gt;
&lt;table bgcolor=&quot;#ffffff&quot; border=&quot;1&quot; cellpadding=&quot;10&quot;&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td&gt;IP Subnet&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td&gt;VLAN&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;

&lt;tr align=&quot;center&quot; valign=&quot;middle&quot;&gt;
&lt;td align=&quot;center&quot; valign=&quot;middle&quot;&gt;23.2.24&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td&gt;1&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr align=&quot;center&quot; valign=&quot;middle&quot;&gt;
&lt;td&gt;26.21.35&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td&gt;2&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;/center&gt;
&lt;center&gt;

&lt;p&gt;&lt;i&gt;Figure&lt;/i&gt;6: Assignment of IP subnet addresses to different VLAN&#39;s.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/center&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;&lt;p&gt;Although VLAN membership is based on Layer 3 information, this has
nothing to do with network routing and should not be confused with
router functions. In this method, IP addresses are used only as a
mapping to determine membership in VLAN&#39;s. No other processing of IP
addresses is done. &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;In Layer 3 VLAN&#39;s, users can move their workstations without
reconfiguring their network addresses. The only problem is that it
generally takes longer to forward packets using Layer 3 information
than using MAC addresses. &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;5) Higher Layer VLAN&#39;s &lt;/b&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;It is also possible to define VLAN membership based on applications
or service, or any combination thereof. For example, file transfer
protocol (FTP) applications can be executed on one VLAN and telnet
applications on another VLAN. &lt;/p&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;


&lt;p&gt;The 802.1Q draft standard defines Layer 1 and Layer 2 VLAN&#39;s only.
Protocol type based VLAN&#39;s and higher layer VLAN&#39;s have been allowed
for, but are not defined in this standard. As a result, these VLAN&#39;s
will remain proprietary. &lt;/p&gt;


&lt;h3&gt;4.2 
&lt;a name=&quot;Connections&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;Types of Connections&lt;/h3&gt;

&lt;p&gt;Devices on a VLAN can be connected in three ways based on whether
the connected devices are VLAN-aware or VLAN-unaware. Recall that a
VLAN-aware device is one which understands VLAN memberships (i.e. which
users belong to a VLAN) and VLAN formats. &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;1) Trunk Link &lt;/b&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;All the devices connected to a trunk link, including workstations,
must be VLAN-aware. All frames on a trunk link must have a special
header attached. These special frames are called tagged frames (see &lt;i&gt;Figure&lt;/i&gt;7). &lt;/p&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;

&lt;center&gt;

&lt;p&gt;
&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cse.wustl.edu/%7Ejain/cis788-97/ftp/virtual_lans/pic3.gif&quot; alt=&quot;pic3.gif&quot; width=&quot;368&quot; height=&quot;201&quot;&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/center&gt;
&lt;center&gt;

&lt;p&gt;&lt;i&gt;Figure&lt;/i&gt;7: Trunk link between two VLAN-aware bridges.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/center&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;2) Access Link &lt;/b&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;An access link connects a VLAN-unaware device to the port of a
VLAN-aware bridge. All frames on access links must be implicitly tagged
(untagged) (see &lt;i&gt;Figure&lt;/i&gt;8). The VLAN-unaware device can be a LAN
segment with VLAN-unaware workstations or it can be a number of LAN
segments containing VLAN-unaware devices (legacy LAN). &lt;/p&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;

&lt;center&gt;

&lt;p&gt;
&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cse.wustl.edu/%7Ejain/cis788-97/ftp/virtual_lans/pic4.gif&quot; alt=&quot;pic4.gif&quot; width=&quot;333&quot; height=&quot;109&quot;&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/center&gt;
&lt;center&gt;

&lt;p&gt;&lt;i&gt;Figure 8&lt;/i&gt;: Access link between a VLAN-aware bridge and a VLAN-unaware device.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/center&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;3) Hybrid Link &lt;/b&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;This is a combination of the previous two links. This is a link
where both VLAN-aware and VLAN-unaware devices are attached (see &lt;i&gt;Figure&lt;/i&gt;9). A hybrid link can have both tagged and untagged frames, but &lt;i&gt;all&lt;/i&gt;the frames for a specific VLAN must be either tagged or untagged. &lt;/p&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;

&lt;center&gt;

&lt;p&gt;
&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cse.wustl.edu/%7Ejain/cis788-97/ftp/virtual_lans/pic5.gif&quot; alt=&quot;pic5.gif&quot; width=&quot;391&quot; height=&quot;237&quot;&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/center&gt;
&lt;center&gt;

&lt;p&gt;&lt;i&gt;Figure&lt;/i&gt;9: Hybrid link containing both VLAN-aware and VLAN-unaware devices.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/center&gt;

&lt;p&gt;It must also be noted that the network can have a combination of all three types of links. &lt;/p&gt;


&lt;h3&gt;4.3 
&lt;a name=&quot;Processing&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;Frame Processing&lt;/h3&gt;

&lt;p&gt;A bridge on receiving data determines to which VLAN the data belongs
either by implicit or explicit tagging. In explicit tagging a tag
header is added to the data. The bridge also keeps track of VLAN
members in a filtering database which it uses to determine where the
data is to be sent. Following is an explanation of the contents of the
filtering database and the format and purpose of the tag header
[802.1Q].&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;1) Filtering Database &lt;/b&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Membership information for a VLAN is stored in a filtering database.
The filtering database consists of the following types of entries: &lt;/p&gt;&lt;ul&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;i) Static Entries &lt;/b&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Static information is added, modified, and deleted by management
only. Entries are not automatically removed after some time (ageing),
but must be explicitly removed by management. There are two types of
static entries: &lt;/p&gt;&lt;ul&gt;&lt;p&gt;a) Static Filtering Entries: which specify for every port whether
frames to be sent to a specific MAC address or group address and on a
specific VLAN should be forwarded or discarded, or should follow the
dynamic entry, and &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;b) Static Registration Entries: which specify whether frames to be
sent to a specific VLAN are to be tagged or untagged and which ports
are registered for that VLAN. &lt;/p&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;ii) Dynamic Entries &lt;/b&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Dynamic entries are learned by the bridge and cannot be created or
updated by management. The learning process observes the port from
which a frame, with a given source address and VLAN ID (VID), is
received, and updates the filtering database. The entry is updated only
if all the following three conditions are satisfied: &lt;/p&gt;&lt;ul&gt;&lt;p&gt;a) this port allows learning, &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;b) the source address is a workstation address and not a group address, and &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;c) there is space available in the database. &lt;/p&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;&lt;p&gt;Entries are removed from the database by the ageing out process
where, after a certain amount of time specified by management (10 sec
--- 1000000 sec), entries allow automatic reconfiguration of the
filtering database if the topology of the network changes. There are
three types of dynamic entries: &lt;/p&gt;&lt;ul&gt;&lt;p&gt;a) Dynamic Filtering Entries: which specify whether frames to be
sent to a specific MAC address and on a certain VLAN should be
forwarded or discarded. &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;b) Group Registration Entries: which indicate for each port whether
frames to be sent to a group MAC address and on a certain VLAN should
be filtered or discarded. These entries are added and deleted using
Group Multicast Registration Protocol (GMRP). This allows multicasts to
be sent on a single VLAN without affecting other VLAN&#39;s. &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;c) Dynamic Registration Entries: which specify which ports are
registered for a specific VLAN. Entries are added and deleted using
GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP), where GARP is the Generic
Attribute Registration Protocol.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;&lt;p&gt;GVRP is used not only to update dynamic registration entries, but
also to communicate the information to other VLAN-aware bridges. &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;In order for VLAN&#39;s to forward information to the correct
destination, all the bridges in the VLAN should contain the same
information in their respective filtering databases. GVRP allows both
VLAN-aware workstations and bridges to issue and revoke VLAN
memberships. VLAN-aware bridges register and propagate VLAN membership
to all ports that are a part of the active topology of the VLAN. The
active topology of a network is determined when the bridges are turned
on or when a change in the state of the current topology is perceived. &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The active topology is determined using a spanning tree algorithm
which prevents the formation of loops in the network by disabling
ports. Once an active topology for the network (which may contain
several VLAN&#39;s) is obtained, the bridges determine an active topology
for each VLAN. This may result in a different topology for each VLAN or
a common one for several VLAN&#39;s. In either case, the VLAN topology will
be a subset of the active topology of the network (see &lt;i&gt;Figure &lt;/i&gt;10).&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;

&lt;center&gt;

&lt;p&gt;
&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cse.wustl.edu/%7Ejain/cis788-97/ftp/virtual_lans/pic10.gif&quot; alt=&quot;pic10.gif&quot; width=&quot;590&quot; height=&quot;484&quot;&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/center&gt;
&lt;center&gt;

&lt;p&gt;&lt;i&gt;Figure&lt;/i&gt;10: Active topology of network and VLAN A using spanning tree algorithm.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/center&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;2) Tagging &lt;/b&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;When frames are sent across the network, there needs to be a way of
indicating to which VLAN the frame belongs, so that the bridge will
forward the frames only to those ports that belong to that VLAN,
instead of to all output ports as would normally have been done. This
information is added to the frame in the form of a tag header. In
addition, the tag header: &lt;/p&gt;&lt;ul&gt;&lt;p&gt;i) allows user priority information to be specified, &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;ii) allows source routing control information to be specified, and &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;iii) indicates the format of MAC addresses. &lt;/p&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;&lt;p&gt;Frames in which a tag header has been added are called tagged
frames. Tagged frames convey the VLAN information across the network. &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The tagged frames that are sent across hybrid and trunk links contain a tag header. There are two formats of the tag header: &lt;/p&gt;&lt;ul&gt;&lt;p&gt;i) Ethernet Frame Tag Header: The ethernet frame tag header (see &lt;i&gt;Figure&lt;/i&gt;11) consists of a tag protocol identifier (TPID) and tag control information (TCI).&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;

&lt;center&gt;

&lt;p&gt;
&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cse.wustl.edu/%7Ejain/cis788-97/ftp/virtual_lans/pic11.gif&quot; alt=&quot;pic11.gif&quot; width=&quot;274&quot; height=&quot;67&quot;&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/center&gt;
&lt;center&gt;

&lt;p&gt;&lt;i&gt;Figure&lt;/i&gt;11: Ethernet frame tag header.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/center&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;&lt;ul&gt;&lt;p&gt;ii) Token Ring and Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) tag
header: The tag headers for both token ring and FDDI networks consist
of a SNAP-encoded TPID and TCI.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;

&lt;center&gt;

&lt;p&gt;
&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cse.wustl.edu/%7Ejain/cis788-97/ftp/virtual_lans/pic12.gif&quot; alt=&quot;pic12.gif&quot; width=&quot;361&quot; height=&quot;75&quot;&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/center&gt;
&lt;center&gt;

&lt;p&gt;&lt;i&gt;Figure&lt;/i&gt;12: Token ring and FDDI tag header.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/center&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;&lt;ul&gt;&lt;p&gt;TPID is the tag protocol identifier which indicates that a tag header is following and TCI (see &lt;i&gt;Figure &lt;/i&gt;13) contains the user priority, canonical format indicator (CFI), and the VLAN ID. &lt;/p&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;

&lt;center&gt;

&lt;p&gt;
&lt;img src=&quot;http://www.cse.wustl.edu/%7Ejain/cis788-97/ftp/virtual_lans/pic13.gif&quot; alt=&quot;pic13.gif&quot; width=&quot;350&quot; height=&quot;73&quot;&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/center&gt;
&lt;center&gt;

&lt;p&gt;&lt;i&gt;Figure&lt;/i&gt;13: Tag control information (TCI).&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/center&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;&lt;ul&gt;&lt;p&gt;User priority is a 3 bit field which allows priority information to
be encoded in the frame. Eight levels of priority are allowed, where
zero is the lowest priority and seven is the highest priority. How this
field is used is described in the supplement 802.1p. &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The CFI bit is used to indicate that all MAC addresses present in
the MAC data field are in canonical format. This field is interpreted
differently depending on whether it is an ethernet-encoded tag header
or a SNAP-encoded tag header. In SNAP-encoded TPID the field indicates
the presence or absence of the canonical format of addresses. In
ethernet-encoded TPID, it indicates the presence of the Source-Routing
Information (RIF) field after the length field. The RIF field indicates
routing on ethernet frames. &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The VID field is used to uniquely identify the VLAN to which the frame belongs. There can be a maximum of (2
&lt;sup&gt;12
&lt;/sup&gt;- 1) VLAN&#39;s. Zero is used to indicate no VLAN ID, but that user
priority information is present. This allows priority to be encoded in
non-priority LAN&#39;s. &lt;/p&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;




&lt;hr width=&quot;100%&quot;&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;5.0 
&lt;a name=&quot;Summary&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;Summary&lt;/h2&gt;

&lt;p&gt;As we have seen there are significant advances in the field of
networks in the form of VLAN&#39;s which allow the formation of virtual
workgroups, better security, improved performance, simplified
administration, and reduced costs. VLAN&#39;s are formed by the logical
segmentation of a network and can be classified into Layer1, 2, 3 and
higher layers. Only Layer 1 and 2 are specified in the draft standard
802.1Q. Tagging and the filtering database allow a bridge to determine
the source and destination VLAN for received data. VLAN&#39;s if
implemented effectively, show considerable promise in future networking
solutions. &lt;br&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Article courtesy of Suba Varadarajan (&lt;a href=&quot;mailto:varadarajan.5@osu.edu&quot;&gt;varadarajan.5@osu.edu&lt;/a&gt;, 1997)&lt;br&gt;&lt;/p&gt;</description>
    
    <category domain="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/CCNADocs">CCNA Docs</category>
    
    
    <ent:cloud ent:href="">
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="VLAN" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=VLAN">VLAN</ent:topic>
    
    </ent:cloud>
    
    
    
  </item>
  
  <item>
    <dc:creator>sparky</dc:creator>
    <title>Configuring Switch Security</title>
    <link>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/1/27/4071414.html</link>
    <guid>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/1/27/4071414.html</guid>
    <pubDate>Tue, 27 Jan 2009 11:20:00 +0000</pubDate>
    <description>&lt;h2 style=&quot;text-decoration: underline;&quot;&gt;Understand the basics&lt;/h2&gt;

&lt;p&gt;In its most basic form, the Port Security feature remembers
the Ethernet MAC address connected to the switch port and allows only that MAC
address to communicate on that port. If any other MAC address tries to
communicate through the port, port security will disable the port. Most of the
time, network administrators configure the switch to send a SNMP trap to their
network monitoring solution that the port&#39;s disabled for security reasons.&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;p&gt;Of course, implementing any security solution always involves
a trade-off—most often, you trade increased security for less convenience. When
using port security, you can prevent devices from accessing the network, which increases
security.&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;p&gt;However, as you know, there&#39;s usually a downside. In this
case, it&#39;s that the network administrator is the only one who can
&quot;unlock&quot; the port, which can cause problems when there are legitimate
reasons to change out devices.&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;h2&gt;Configure port security&lt;/h2&gt;

&lt;p&gt;Configuring the Port Security feature is relatively easy. In
its simplest form, port security requires going to an already enabled switch
port and entering the &lt;i&gt;port-security&lt;/i&gt;Interface Mode command&lt;b&gt;. &lt;/b&gt;Here&#39;s an example:&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;Switch)# config t&lt;br&gt;Switch(config)# int fa0/18&lt;br&gt;Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security ?&lt;br&gt;  aging           Port-security aging commands&lt;br&gt;  mac-address     Secure mac address&lt;br&gt;  maximum         Max secure addresses&lt;br&gt;  violation       Security violation mode&lt;br&gt;  &lt;cr&gt;&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security &lt;br&gt;Switch(config-if)#^Z&lt;br&gt;&lt;/cr&gt;&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;p&gt;By entering the most basic command to configure port
security, we accepted the default settings of only allowing one MAC address,
determining that MAC address from the first device that communicates on this
switch port, and shutting down that switch port if another MAC address attempts
to communicate via the port. But you don&#39;t have to accept the defaults.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h2&gt;Know your options&lt;/h2&gt;

&lt;p&gt;As you can see in the example, there are a number of other
port security commands that you can configure. Here are some of your options:&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;ul type=&quot;disc&quot;&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;b&gt;&lt;i&gt;switchport
     port-security maximum {max # of MAC addresses allowed}&lt;/i&gt;:&lt;/b&gt; You can
     use this option to allow more than the default number of MAC addresses,
     which is one. For example, if you had a 12-port hub connected to this
     switch port, you would want to allow 12 MAC addresses—one for each device.
     The maximum number of secure MAC addresses per port is 132.&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;b&gt;&lt;i&gt;switchport
     port-security violation {shutdown | restrict | protect}&lt;/i&gt;:&lt;/b&gt; This
     command tells the switch what to do when the number of MAC addresses on the
     port has exceeded the maximum. The default is to shut down the port. However,
     you can also choose to alert the network administrator (i.e., &lt;i&gt;restrict&lt;/i&gt;) or only allow traffic
     from the secure port and drop packets from other MAC addresses (i.e., &lt;i&gt;protect&lt;/i&gt;).&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;b&gt;&lt;i&gt;switchport
     port-security mac-address {MAC address}&lt;/i&gt;:&lt;/b&gt; You can use this option to
     manually define the MAC address allowed for this port rather than letting
     the port dynamically determine the MAC address.&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;

&lt;p&gt;Of course, you can also configure port security on a range
of ports. Here&#39;s an example:&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;Switch)# config t&lt;br&gt;Switch(config)# int range fastEthernet 0/1 - 24  &lt;br&gt;Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security &lt;br&gt;&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;p&gt;However, you need to be very careful with this option if you
enter this command on an uplink port that goes to more than one device. As soon
as the second device sends a packet, the entire port will shut down.&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;h2&gt;View the status of port security&lt;/h2&gt;

&lt;p&gt;Once you&#39;ve configured port security and the Ethernet device
on that port has sent traffic, the switch will record the MAC address and
secure the port using that address. To find out the status of port security on
the switch, you can use the &lt;i&gt;show port-security
address&lt;/i&gt; and &lt;i&gt;show port-security interface&lt;/i&gt; commands. Below are examples for each
command&#39;s output:&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;Switch# &lt;b&gt;show port-security address&lt;/b&gt;         &lt;br&gt;          Secure Mac Address Table&lt;br&gt;-------------------------------------------------------------------&lt;br&gt;Vlan    Mac Address       Type                Ports   Remaining Age&lt;br&gt;                                                         (mins)    &lt;br&gt;----    -----------       ----                -----   -------------&lt;br&gt;   1    0004.00d5.285d    SecureDynamic       Fa0/18       -&lt;br&gt;-------------------------------------------------------------------&lt;br&gt;Total Addresses in System (excluding one mac per port)     : 0&lt;br&gt;Max Addresses limit in System (excluding one mac per port) : 1024&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;Switch# &lt;b&gt;show port-security interface fa0/18&lt;/b&gt;&lt;br&gt;Port Security                        : Enabled&lt;br&gt;Port Status                          : Secure-up&lt;br&gt;Violation Mode                       : Shutdown&lt;br&gt;Aging Time                           : 0 mins&lt;br&gt;Aging Type                           : Absolute&lt;br&gt;SecureStatic Address Aging           : Disabled&lt;br&gt;Maximum MAC Addresses                : 1&lt;br&gt;Total MAC Addresses                  : 1&lt;br&gt;Configured MAC Addresses             : 0&lt;br&gt;Sticky MAC Addresses                 : 0&lt;br&gt;Last Source Address                  : 0004.00d5.285d&lt;br&gt;Security Violation Count             : 0&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;Switch#&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;Article courtesy of Techrepublic.com&lt;br&gt;&lt;/pre&gt;</description>
    
    <category domain="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog">Main Page</category>
    
    <category domain="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/CCNADocs">CCNA Docs</category>
    
    <category domain="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/CiscoSecurity">Cisco Security</category>
    
    
    <ent:cloud ent:href="">
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="Switcing" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=Switcing">Switcing</ent:topic>
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="Security" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=Security">Security</ent:topic>
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="CCNA" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=CCNA">CCNA</ent:topic>
    
    </ent:cloud>
    
    
    
  </item>
  
  <item>
    <dc:creator>sparky</dc:creator>
    <title>Features of the Cisco Catalyst Switch</title>
    <link>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/1/21/4064567.html</link>
    <guid>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/1/21/4064567.html</guid>
    <pubDate>Wed, 21 Jan 2009 10:01:00 +0000</pubDate>
    <description>&lt;span style=&quot;font-weight: bold; text-decoration: underline;&quot;&gt;The features of Cisco Catalyst Switches&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;Now that you know which switch features are used at which layer in a hierarchical network, you will learn about the Cisco switches that are applicable for each layer in the hierarchical network model. Today, you cannot simply select a Cisco switch by considering the size of a business. A small business with 12 employees might be integrated into the network of a large multinational enterprise and require all of the advanced LAN services available at the corporate head office. The following classification of Cisco switches within the hierarchical network model represents a starting point for your deliberations on which switch is best for a given application. The classification presented reflects how you might see the range of Cisco switches if you were a multinational enterprise. For example, the port densities of the Cisco 6500 switch only makes sense as an access layer switch where there are many hundreds of users in one area, such as the floor of a stock exchange. If you think of the needs of a medium-sized business, a switch that is shown as an access layer switch, the Cisco 3560 for example, could be used as a distribution layer switch if it met the criteria determined by the network designer for that application.&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;Cisco has seven switch product lines. Each product line offers different characteristics and features, allowing you to find the right switch to meet the functional requirements of your network. The Cisco switch product lines are:&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;Catalyst Express 500&lt;br&gt;Catalyst 2960&lt;br&gt;Catalyst 3560&lt;br&gt;Catalyst 3750&lt;br&gt;Catalyst 4500&lt;br&gt;Catalyst 4900&lt;br&gt;Catalyst 6500&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;text-decoration: underline; font-weight: bold;&quot;&gt;Catalyst Express 500&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;The Catalyst Express 500 is Cisco&#39;s entry-layer switch. It offers the following:&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;Forwarding rates from 8.8 Gb/s to 24 Gb/s&lt;br&gt;Layer 2 port security&lt;br&gt;Web-based management&lt;br&gt;Converged data/IP communications support&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;This switch series is appropriate for access layer implementations where high port density is not required. The Cisco Catalyst Express 500 series switches are scaled for small business environments ranging from 20 to 250 employees. The Catalyst Express 500 series switches are available in different fixed configurations:&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet connectivity&lt;br&gt;Up to 24 10/100 ports with optional PoE or 12 10/100/1000 ports&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;Catalyst Express 500 series switches do not allow management through the Cisco IOS CLI. They are managed using a built-in web management interface, the Cisco Network Assistant or the new Cisco Configuration Manager developed specifically for the Catalyst Express 500 series switches. The Catalyst Express does not support console access.&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;To learn more about the Cisco Express 500 series of switches, go to http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps6545/index.html.&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;text-decoration: underline; font-weight: bold;&quot;&gt;Catalyst 2960&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;The Catalyst 2960 series switches enable entry-layer enterprise, medium-sized, and branch office networks to provide enhanced LAN services. The Catalyst 2960 series switches are appropriate for access layer implementations where access to power and space is limited. The CCNA Exploration 3 LAN Switching and Wireless labs are based on the features of the Cisco 2960 switch.&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;The Catalyst 2960 series switches offers the following:&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;Forwarding rates from 16 Gb/s to 32 Gb/s&lt;br&gt;Multilayered switching&lt;br&gt;QoS features to support IP communications&lt;br&gt;Access control lists (ACLs)&lt;br&gt;Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet connectivity&lt;br&gt;Up to 48 10/100 ports or 10/100/1000 ports with additional dual purpose gigabit uplinks&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;The Catalyst 2960 series of switches do not support PoE.&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;The Catalyst 2960 series supports the Cisco IOS CLI, integrated web management interface, and Cisco Network Assistant. This switch series supports console and auxiliary access to the switch.&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;To learn more about the Catalyst 2960 series of switches, visit http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps6406/index.html.&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;text-decoration: underline; font-weight: bold;&quot;&gt;Catalyst 3560&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;The Cisco Catalyst 3560 series is a line of enterprise-class switches that include support for PoE, QoS, and advanced security features such as ACLs. These switches are ideal access layer switches for small enterprise LAN access or branch-office converged network environments.&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;The Cisco Catalyst 3560 Series supports forwarding rates of 32 Gb/s to 128 Gb/s (Catalyst 3560-E switch series).&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;The Catalyst 3560 series switches are available in different fixed configurations:&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet connectivity&lt;br&gt;Up to 48 10/100/1000 ports, plus four small form-factor pluggable (SFP) ports&lt;br&gt;Optional 10 Gigabit Ethernet connectivity in the Catalyst 3560-E models&lt;br&gt;Optional Integrated PoE (Cisco pre-standard and IEEE 802.3af); up to 24 ports with 15.4 watts or 48 ports with 7.3 watts&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;To learn more about the Catalyst 3560 series of switches, visit http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/switches/ps5528/index.html.&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;text-decoration: underline; font-weight: bold;&quot;&gt;Catalyst 3750&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;The Cisco Catalyst 3750 series of switches are ideal for access layer switches in midsize organizations and enterprise branch offices. This series offers forwarding rates from 32 Gb/s to 128 Gb/s (Catalyst 3750-E switch series). The Catalyst 3750 series supports Cisco StackWise technology. StackWise technology allows you to interconnect up to nine physical Catalyst 3750 switches into one logical switch using a high-performance (32 Gb/s), redundant, backplane connection.&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;The Catalyst 3750 series switches are available in different stackable fixed configurations:&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet connectivity&lt;br&gt;Up to 48 10/100/1000 ports, plus four SFP ports&lt;br&gt;Optional 10 Gigabit Ethernet connectivity in the Catalyst 3750-E models&lt;br&gt;Optional Integrated PoE (Cisco pre-standard and IEEE 802.3af); up to 24 ports with 15.4 watts or 48 ports with 7.3 watts&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;To learn more about the Catalyst 3750 series of switches, visit http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/switches/ps5023/index.html.&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;text-decoration: underline; font-weight: bold;&quot;&gt;Catalyst 4500&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;The Catalyst 4500 is the first midrange modular switching platform offering multilayer switching for enterprises, small- to medium-sized businesses, and service providers. &lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;With forwarding rates up to 136 Gb/s, the Catalyst 4500 series is capable of managing traffic at the distribution layer. The modular capability of the Catalyst 4500 series allows for very high port densities through the addition of switch port line cards to its modular chassis. The Catalyst 4500 series offers multilayer QoS and sophisticated routing functions.&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;The Catalyst 4500 series switches are available in different modular configurations:&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;Modular 3, 6, 7, and 10 slot chassis offering different layers of scalability&lt;br&gt;High port density: up to 384 Fast Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet ports available in copper or fiber with 10 Gigabit uplinks&lt;br&gt;PoE (Cisco pre-standard and IEEE 802.3af)&lt;br&gt;Dual, hot-swappable internal AC or DC power supplies&lt;br&gt;Advanced hardware-assisted IP routing capabilities&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;To learn more about the Catalyst 4500 series of switches, visit http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/switches/ps4324/index.html.&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;text-decoration: underline; font-weight: bold;&quot;&gt;Catalyst 4900&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;The Catalyst 4900 series switches are designed and optimized for server switching by allowing very high forwarding rates. The Cisco Catalyst 4900 is not a typical access layer switch. It is a specialty access layer switch designed for data center deployments where many servers may exist in close proximity. This switch series supports dual, redundant power supplies and fans that can be swapped out while the switch is still running. This allows the switches to achieve higher availability, which is critical in data center deployments.&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;The Catalyst 4900 series switches support advanced QoS features, making them ideal candidates for the back-end IP telephony hardware. Catalyst 4900 series switches do not support the StackWise feature of the Catalyst 3750 series nor do they support PoE.&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;The Catalyst 4900 series switches are available in different fixed configurations:&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;Up to 48 10/100/1000 ports with four SFP ports or 48 10/100/1000 ports with two 10GbE ports&lt;br&gt;Dual, hot-swappable internal AC or DC power supplies&lt;br&gt;Hot-swappable fan trays&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;To learn more about the Catalyst 4900 series of switches, visit http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps6021/index.html.&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;text-decoration: underline; font-weight: bold;&quot;&gt;Catalyst 6500&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;The Catalyst 6500 series modular switch is optimized for secure, converged voice, video, and data networks. The Catalyst 6500 is capable of managing traffic at the distribution and core layers. The Catalyst 6500 series is the highest performing Cisco switch, supporting forwarding rates up to 720 Gb/s. The Catalyst 6500 is ideal for very large network environments found in enterprises, medium-sized businesses, and service providers.&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;The Catalyst 6500 series switches are available in different modular configurations:&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;Modular 3, 4, 6, 9, and 13 slot chassis&lt;br&gt;LAN/WAN service modules&lt;br&gt;PoE up to 420 IEEE 802.3af Class 3 (15.4W) PoE devices&lt;br&gt;Up to 1152 10/100 ports, 577 10/100/1000 ports, 410 SFP Gigabit Ethernet ports, or 64 10 Gigabit Ethernet ports&lt;br&gt;Dual, hot-swappable internal AC or DC power supplies&lt;br&gt;Advanced hardware-assisted IP routing capabilities&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;To learn more about the Catalyst 6500 series of switches, visit http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/switches/ps708/index.html. &lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;The following tool can help identify the correct switch for an implementation: http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/switches/products_promotion0900aecd8050364f.html. &lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;The following guide provides a detailed comparison of current switch offerings from Cisco: http://www.cisco.com/en/US/prod/switches/ps5718/ps708/networking_solutions_products_genericcontent0900aecd805f0955.pdf.&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;</description>
    
    <category domain="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog">Main Page</category>
    
    <category domain="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/CCNADocs">CCNA Docs</category>
    
    <category domain="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/GeneralNetworking">General Networking</category>
    
    
    <ent:cloud ent:href="">
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="Switcing" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=Switcing">Switcing</ent:topic>
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="CCNA" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=CCNA">CCNA</ent:topic>
    
    </ent:cloud>
    
    
    
  </item>
  
  <item>
    <dc:creator>sparky</dc:creator>
    <title>The Basics of the Cisco PIX Firewall</title>
    <link>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/1/20/4063751.html</link>
    <guid>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/1/20/4063751.html</guid>
    <pubDate>Tue, 20 Jan 2009 14:55:00 +0000</pubDate>
    <description>&lt;h1&gt;The Basics of the Cisco PIX Firewall&lt;br&gt;&lt;/h1&gt;&lt;h2&gt;The Six Basic Commands&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;p&gt;The six basic commands to configure a Cisco PIX firewall are well known: &lt;tt&gt;nameif&lt;/tt&gt;, &lt;tt&gt;interface&lt;/tt&gt;, &lt;tt&gt;ip address&lt;/tt&gt;, &lt;tt&gt;global&lt;/tt&gt;, &lt;tt&gt;nat&lt;/tt&gt;, and &lt;tt&gt;route&lt;/tt&gt;. The &lt;tt&gt;nameif&lt;/tt&gt;, &lt;tt&gt;interface&lt;/tt&gt;, and &lt;tt&gt;ip address&lt;/tt&gt; commands are the necessary minimum to get the PIX to communicate with other devices. &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;h3 style=&quot;text-decoration: underline;&quot;&gt;&lt;tt&gt;nameif&lt;/tt&gt;&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;p&gt;The &lt;tt&gt;nameif&lt;/tt&gt; command has two big jobs to perform. It names the interface and assigns a security level. The syntax of the command follows: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;pre&gt;&lt;b&gt;nameif&lt;/b&gt; hardware_id if_name security_level&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;p&gt;The &lt;i&gt;&lt;tt&gt;hardware_id&lt;/tt&gt;&lt;/i&gt; is the type of hardware that is
being used for the interface. Examples are Gigabit Ethernet, Ethernet,
Token Ring, and FDDI. It is important to note that both Token Ring and
FDDI have reached end-of-sale status at Cisco. The last date that the
Token Ring interface was available for sale was August 25, 2001. The
last date that the FDDI interface was available for sale was June 23,
2001.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;The &lt;i&gt;&lt;tt&gt;if_name&lt;/tt&gt;&lt;/i&gt; is the name of the interface. The name
can be up to 48 characters in length and can be uppercase or lowercase.
Default names appear in the configuration of the PIX. By default, the
E0 interface is named the outside interface and is considered the least
secure interface. The E1 interface is named inside, by default, and is
considered the most secure. If the PIX has more than two interfaces,
the default names of the additional interfaces are intf2 for E2, intf3
for E3, and so on.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;The third variable parameter is &lt;i&gt;&lt;tt&gt;security_level&lt;/tt&gt;&lt;/i&gt;. The
security level is used to define how to configure the PIX to permit
traffic to be passed. The inside interface has a default security level
of 100. The outside interface has a default security level of 0. 100 is
the maximum permitted, and 0 is the minimum. An interface with a higher
security level number assigned is considered more secure. If the PIX
has more than two interfaces, the default security level of the
additional interfaces is 10 for E2 and 15 for E3; each additional
interface security level increments by 5.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;An interface with a higher security level (assigned to the
interface) is considered to be more trusted than an interface with a
lower security level. This is an important distinction to understand
when configuring data flow. By default, with no configuration
parameters input, no data can pass through the PIX. When utilizing the
six basic commands that are discussed here, you may configure the PIX
to pass data from a more trusted side of the PIX to a less trusted side
of the PIX.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;An example of a three-interface configuration using nameif might look like this:&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;pre&gt;pixfirewall# &lt;b&gt;write terminal&lt;/b&gt;&lt;br&gt;Building configuration…&lt;br&gt;: Saved&lt;br&gt;:&lt;br&gt;PIX Version 6.0(1)&lt;br&gt;nameif ethernet0 outside security0&lt;br&gt;nameif ethernet1 inside security100&lt;br&gt;nameif ethernet2 dmz security 50&lt;br&gt;.&lt;br&gt;.&lt;br&gt;.&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;h3 style=&quot;text-decoration: underline;&quot;&gt;&lt;tt&gt;interface&lt;/tt&gt;&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;p&gt;The &lt;tt&gt;interface&lt;/tt&gt; command is used to identify the network
interface type, the hardware speed, and the duplex setting (if
applicable); it also enables the interface. Network interface types are
Ethernet, Gigabit Ethernet, Token Ring, and FDDI. The &lt;tt&gt;interface&lt;/tt&gt;
command can be used to shut down an interface, just as an administrator
can do on a Cisco router. An interface that is shut down is one that is
disabled and is passing no data due to the configuration. The &lt;tt&gt;interface&lt;/tt&gt; command syntax is shown here:&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;pre&gt;&lt;b&gt;Interface&lt;/b&gt; hardware_id [hardware_speed] &lt;b&gt;[shutdown]&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;p&gt;If an interface is shut down, configuring that interface and leaving off the variable &lt;tt&gt;&lt;i&gt;shutdown&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/tt&gt; will enable the interface. This is an example of configuring the &lt;tt&gt;interface&lt;/tt&gt; command on a three-interface PIX using the &lt;tt&gt;auto&lt;/tt&gt; option (which will set the Ethernet speed automatically) for &lt;tt&gt;&lt;i&gt;hardware_speed&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/tt&gt;:
&lt;/p&gt;&lt;pre&gt;interface ethernet0 auto&lt;br&gt;interface ethernet1 auto&lt;br&gt;interface ethernet2 auto&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;h3 style=&quot;text-decoration: underline;&quot;&gt;&lt;tt&gt;ip address&lt;/tt&gt;&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Assigning an IP address to an interface is accomplished with the &lt;tt&gt;ip address&lt;/tt&gt; command. Each interface that is to be used to pass data must be configured with an IP address. When configuring the &lt;tt&gt;ip address&lt;/tt&gt; command, the IP address is bound to the interface name that was created with the &lt;tt&gt;nameif&lt;/tt&gt; command:&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;pre&gt;ip address if_name ip_address [netmask]&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;p&gt;When the &lt;tt&gt;nameif&lt;/tt&gt;, &lt;tt&gt;interface&lt;/tt&gt;, and &lt;tt&gt;ip address&lt;/tt&gt; commands are configured, it is possible to learn the status of the interfaces. Issuing the &lt;tt&gt;show interface&lt;/tt&gt;
command will let you know whether the interfaced is up or down. If the
interface is up, you may also test connectivity to the PIX. You may
issue a &lt;tt&gt;ping&lt;/tt&gt; command to find out whether the PIX is communicating with a neighbor device on the same network.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;h3 style=&quot;text-decoration: underline;&quot;&gt;&lt;tt&gt;route&lt;/tt&gt;&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;p&gt;When passing data to a destination network that is not directly
connected to the PIX, the destination network must be specified. The
destination network is specified using the &lt;tt&gt;route&lt;/tt&gt; command. The
PIX is not a router, although it sometimes behaves in a routerlike
fashion. The PIX cannot make the same kinds of dynamic routing
decisions that a router makes; it must be configured statically.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;pre&gt;&lt;b&gt;Route&lt;/b&gt; if_name ip_address netmask gateway_ip [metric]&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Here, &lt;tt&gt;&lt;i&gt;if_name&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/tt&gt; is the name of the interface that the data will pass through when exiting the PIX. The &lt;tt&gt;&lt;i&gt;gateway_ip&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/tt&gt; is the IP address of the device (usually a router) that is the next-hop device to the destination network.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;It is common to use a default route to the untrusted side of the PIX
(the outside interface). The following is an example of how the route
commands might be configured if the outside interface were connected to
the Internet and the inside interface were connected to your company
intranet, which consists of three subnets. The inside interface is
directly connected to the 10.2.0.0 255.255.0.0 subnet. The 10.3.0.0 and
10.4.0.0 subnets are reached via a router with a local interface of
10.2.1.4.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;pre&gt;route outside 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 192.168.1.1 1&lt;br&gt;route inside 10.3.0.0 255.255.0.0 10.2.1.4 1&lt;br&gt;route inside 10.4.0.0 255.255.0.0 10.2.1.4 1&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;p&gt;With the default route, any traffic that is permitted to pass
through the PIX that has a destination network other than 10.2.0.0,
10.3.0.0, and 10.4.0.0 will be passed through the outside interface to
192.168.1.1 for routing.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;h3 style=&quot;text-decoration: underline;&quot;&gt;&lt;tt&gt;global&lt;/tt&gt; and &lt;tt&gt;nat&lt;/tt&gt;&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Now it&#39;s time to configure the PIX to allow data to pass through.
One of the jobs that the PIX performs very well is address translation.
The IP address that enters the PIX through a more trusted interface
(this is referred to as a &lt;i&gt;local&lt;/i&gt; address) is translated to a
different IP address when it exits the PIX through a less trusted
interface (this is referred to as the &lt;i&gt;global&lt;/i&gt; address).&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;To pass this data, it is necessary to input some configuration
parameters. One way to configure the PIX to permit this data is to use
the &lt;tt&gt;global&lt;/tt&gt; and &lt;tt&gt;nat&lt;/tt&gt; statements.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;The &lt;tt&gt;nat&lt;/tt&gt; command enables network address translation. &lt;tt&gt;nat&lt;/tt&gt; also defines the local IP addresses that are to be translated to the global IP addresses defined in the &lt;tt&gt;global&lt;/tt&gt; statement. The syntax for the &lt;tt&gt;nat&lt;/tt&gt; and &lt;tt&gt;global&lt;/tt&gt; commands follows:&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;pre&gt;&lt;b&gt;nat&lt;/b&gt; (if_name) nat_id local_ip [netmask]&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Data enters the PIX via the interface defined with the &lt;tt&gt;&lt;i&gt;if_name&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/tt&gt; variable. The &lt;tt&gt;&lt;i&gt;nat_id&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/tt&gt;
is an arbitrary, administrator-assigned number between zero and two
billion (0 is reserved for a specific purpose, but that is a discussion
for another article). The &lt;tt&gt;&lt;i&gt;nat_id&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/tt&gt; number used here must match the one used with the corresponding &lt;tt&gt;global&lt;/tt&gt; command. The &lt;tt&gt;&lt;i&gt;nat_id&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/tt&gt; number is what binds the &lt;tt&gt;nat&lt;/tt&gt; and &lt;tt&gt;global&lt;/tt&gt; statements together. The &lt;tt&gt;&lt;i&gt;local_ip&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/tt&gt; is the more trusted local network that is to be translated to the address or addresses defined in the &lt;tt&gt;global&lt;/tt&gt; command.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;pre&gt;&lt;b&gt;global&lt;/b&gt; (if_name) nat_id global_ip [-global_ip] [&lt;b&gt;netmask&lt;/b&gt; global_mask]&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Data exits the PIX via the interface defined with the &lt;tt&gt;&lt;i&gt;if_name&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/tt&gt; variable of the &lt;tt&gt;global&lt;/tt&gt; command. The &lt;tt&gt;&lt;i&gt;nat_id&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/tt&gt; number used here must match the one used with the corresponding &lt;tt&gt;nat&lt;/tt&gt; command. The &lt;tt&gt;&lt;i&gt;global_ip&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/tt&gt; defines the global IP address or global network number.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;An example of a two-interface PIX configuration using each of the six basic commands follows:&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;pre&gt;nameif ethernet0 outside security0&lt;br&gt;nameif ethernet1 inside security100&lt;br&gt;interface ethernet0 auto&lt;br&gt;interface ethernet1 auto&lt;br&gt;ip address outside 192.168.1.2 255.255.255.0&lt;br&gt;ip address inside 10.2.1.1 255.255.0.0&lt;br&gt;global (outside) 1 192.168.1.20-192.168.1.254&lt;br&gt;nat (inside) 1 10.0.0.0 255.0.0.0&lt;br&gt;route outside 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 192.168.1.1 1&lt;br&gt;route inside 10.3.0.0 255.255.0.0 10.2.1.4 1&lt;br&gt;route inside 10.4.0.0 255.255.0.0 10.2.1.4 1&lt;/pre&gt;Article is provided courtesy of &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.ciscopress.com&quot;&gt;Cisco Press&lt;/a&gt;.Date: Feb 15, 2002.</description>
    
    <category domain="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog">Main Page</category>
    
    <category domain="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/CCNADocs">CCNA Docs</category>
    
    <category domain="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/CiscoSecurity">Cisco Security</category>
    
    
    <ent:cloud ent:href="">
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="PIX" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=PIX">PIX</ent:topic>
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="Security" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=Security">Security</ent:topic>
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="Firewall" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=Firewall">Firewall</ent:topic>
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="CCNA" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=CCNA">CCNA</ent:topic>
    
    </ent:cloud>
    
    
    
  </item>
  
  <item>
    <dc:creator>sparky</dc:creator>
    <title>Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS)</title>
    <link>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/1/8/4049929.html</link>
    <guid>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/1/8/4049929.html</guid>
    <pubDate>Thu, 08 Jan 2009 12:20:00 +0000</pubDate>
    <description>&lt;SPAN class=a3&gt;
&lt;P&gt;&lt;FONT face=Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif&gt;&lt;U&gt;&lt;STRONG&gt;Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS)&lt;/STRONG&gt;&lt;/U&gt; is a standards-approved technology for speeding up network traffic flow and making it easier to manage. MPLS involves setting up a specific path for a given sequence of packets, identified by a label put in each packet, thus saving the time needed for a router to look up the address to the next node to forward the packet to. With reference to the OSI model, MPLS allows most packets to be forwarded at Layer 2 (switching) rather than at Layer 3 (routing). In addition to moving traffic faster overall, MPLS makes it easy to manage a network for quality of service (&lt;/FONT&gt;&lt;A href=&quot;http://searchvoip.techtarget.com/sDefinition/0,,sid66_gci213826,00.html&quot;&gt;&lt;FONT face=Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif&gt;QoS&lt;/FONT&gt;&lt;/A&gt;&lt;FONT face=Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif&gt;). For these reasons, the technique is expected to be readily adopted as networks begin to carry more and different mixtures of traffic. (Definition courtesy of Whatis.com.)&lt;/FONT&gt;&lt;/P&gt;
&lt;P&gt;&lt;FONT face=Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif&gt;MPLS is called &lt;EM&gt;multiprotocol&lt;/EM&gt; because it works with the Internet Protocol (IP), Asynchronous Transport Mode (ATM), and frame relay network protocols. The claim to fame of MPLS is &quot;any-to-any&quot; connectivity. This statement generally implies a comparison to &lt;/FONT&gt;&lt;A href=&quot;http://searchnetworking.techtarget.com/sDefinition/0,290660,sid7_gci214317,00.html&quot;&gt;&lt;FONT face=Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif&gt;permanent virtual circuit&lt;/FONT&gt;&lt;/A&gt;&lt;FONT face=Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif&gt; (PVC)-based technologies such as frame relay and ATM, where each site has a physical circuit connecting it to the &quot;cloud.&quot; Logical circuits are then configured on the physical circuits to create virtual circuits connecting sites together. &lt;/FONT&gt;&lt;/P&gt;
&lt;P&gt;&lt;SPAN class=a3&gt;&lt;FONT face=Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif&gt;If you were to purchase a full mesh of virtual circuits connecting every site to every other site, you would essentially have the same any-to-any connectivity offered by MPLS. Under the covers, of course, it&#39;s quite different, because packets are label switched and traffic engineered instead of being &lt;/FONT&gt;&lt;A href=&quot;http://searchnetworking.techtarget.com/sDefinition/0,290660,sid7_gci211787,00.html&quot;&gt;&lt;FONT face=Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif&gt;circuit-switched&lt;/FONT&gt;&lt;/A&gt;&lt;FONT face=Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif&gt; and provisioned. &lt;/FONT&gt;&lt;/SPAN&gt;&lt;/P&gt;&lt;SPAN class=a3&gt;&lt;SPAN class=a3&gt;
&lt;P&gt;&lt;FONT face=Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif&gt;An MPLS-based network consists of routers and switches interconnected via transport facilities such as fiber links. Customers connect to the backbone (core) network through multiservice edge (MSE) routers. The backbone comprises the core routers that provide high-speed transport and connectivity between the MSE routers. An MSE router contains different types of line cards and physical interfaces to provide Layer 2 and Layer 3 services, including ATM, FR, Ethernet, and IP/MPLS VPNs. &lt;/FONT&gt;&lt;/P&gt;
&lt;P&gt;&lt;FONT face=Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif&gt;In the incoming direction, line cards receive packets from external interfaces and forward them to the switching fabric. In the outgoing direction, line cards receive packets from the switching fabric and forward them to the outgoing interfaces. The switching fabric, the heart of the router, is used for switching packets between line cards. The IP/MPLS control-plane software, the brain of a router, resides in the control processor card. The phrase &lt;EM&gt;IP/MPLS control plane&lt;/EM&gt; refers to the set of tasks performed by IP routing and MPLS signaling protocols. IP routing protocols are used to advertise network topology, exchange routing information, and calculate forwarding paths between routers within (intra) and between (inter) network routing domains. Examples of IP routing protocols include Open Shortest Path First (OSPF), Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System (IS-IS), and Border Gateway Protocol (BGP). MPLS signaling protocols are used to establish, maintain, and release label-switched paths (LSP). Examples of MPLS signaling protocols include BGP, Label Distribution Protocol (LDP), and Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP). The IP control plane may also contain tunneling protocols such as Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol (L2TP) and Generic Routing Encapsulation (GRE). &lt;/FONT&gt;&lt;/P&gt;
&lt;P&gt;&lt;FONT face=Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif&gt;Because redundant network elements add to the overall network cost, service providers typically employ different levels and types of fault tolerance in the edge and core network. For example, the core network is generally designed to protect against core router failures through mesh connectivity. This allows alternative paths to be quickly established and used in the face of a failure. In the core, additional routers and links are used to provide fault tolerance. In contrast, on the edge, often thousands of customers are connected through a single router, and the edge router usually represents a single point of failure. The edge router is what most service providers consider the most vulnerable point of their network after the core is protected. On the edge, instead of using additional routers and links as in the core, redundancy within the edge router via redundant control processor cards, redundant line cards, and redundant links (such as SONET/SDH Automatic Protection Switching [APS]) are commonly used to provide fault tolerance. &lt;/FONT&gt;&lt;/P&gt;
&lt;P&gt;&lt;FONT face=Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif&gt;ref: http://searchnetworking.techtarget.com/generic/0,295582,sid7_gci1225222,00.html#basics&lt;/FONT&gt;&lt;/P&gt;&lt;/SPAN&gt;&lt;/SPAN&gt;&lt;/SPAN&gt;</description>
    
    <category domain="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog">Main Page</category>
    
    <category domain="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/GeneralNetworking">General Networking</category>
    
    
    <ent:cloud ent:href="">
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="MPLS" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=MPLS">MPLS</ent:topic>
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="Routing" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=Routing">Routing</ent:topic>
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="Cisco" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=Cisco">Cisco</ent:topic>
    
    </ent:cloud>
    
    
    
  </item>
  
  <item>
    <dc:creator>sparky</dc:creator>
    <title>Broadband Remote Access Server</title>
    <link>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/1/8/4049924.html</link>
    <guid>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/1/8/4049924.html</guid>
    <pubDate>Thu, 08 Jan 2009 12:15:00 +0000</pubDate>
    <description>&lt;P&gt;A &lt;strong&gt;broadband remote access server&lt;/strong&gt; (BRAS or BBRAS) routes traffic to and from the &lt;A title=&quot;Digital subscriber line access multiplexer&quot; href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Digital_subscriber_line_access_multiplexer&quot;&gt;digital subscriber line access multiplexers&lt;/A&gt; (DSLAM) on an &lt;A title=&quot;Internet service provider&quot; href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Internet_service_provider&quot;&gt;Internet service provider&lt;/A&gt;&#39;s (ISP) network.&lt;/P&gt;
&lt;P&gt;The BRAS sits at the core of an ISP&#39;s network, and aggregates user sessions from the &lt;A title=&quot;Access network&quot; href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Access_network&quot;&gt;access network&lt;/A&gt;. It is at the BRAS that an ISP can inject policy management and IP &lt;A class=mw-redirect title=&quot;Quality of Service&quot; href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Quality_of_Service&quot;&gt;Quality of Service&lt;/A&gt; (QoS).&lt;/P&gt;
&lt;P&gt;The specific tasks include:&lt;/P&gt;
&lt;UL&gt;
&lt;LI&gt;Aggregates the output from &lt;A title=&quot;Digital subscriber line access multiplexer&quot; href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Digital_subscriber_line_access_multiplexer&quot;&gt;DSLAMs&lt;/A&gt;&lt;/LI&gt;
&lt;LI&gt;Provides user &lt;A title=&quot;Point-to-Point Protocol&quot; href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Point-to-Point_Protocol&quot;&gt;PPP&lt;/A&gt; sessions over &lt;A title=&quot;Internet Protocol&quot; href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Internet_Protocol&quot;&gt;IP&lt;/A&gt; or &lt;A title=&quot;Asynchronous Transfer Mode&quot; href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Asynchronous_Transfer_Mode&quot;&gt;ATM&lt;/A&gt; sessions&lt;/LI&gt;
&lt;LI&gt;Enforces quality of service (&lt;A class=mw-redirect title=QoS href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/QoS&quot;&gt;QoS&lt;/A&gt;) policies&lt;/LI&gt;
&lt;LI&gt;Routes traffic into an &lt;A title=&quot;Internet service provider&quot; href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Internet_service_provider&quot;&gt;Internet service provider&lt;/A&gt;’s backbone network&lt;/LI&gt;&lt;/UL&gt;
&lt;P&gt;A &lt;A title=&quot;Digital subscriber line access multiplexer&quot; href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Digital_subscriber_line_access_multiplexer&quot;&gt;DSLAM&lt;/A&gt; collects data traffic from multiple subscribers into a centralized point so that it can be uploaded to the router over a Frame Relay, ATM, or Ethernet connection.&lt;/P&gt;
&lt;P&gt;The router provides the logical termination for PPP sessions. These may be PPP over Ethernet (&lt;A class=mw-redirect title=PPPoE href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/PPPoE&quot;&gt;PPPoE&lt;/A&gt;) or PPP over ATM (&lt;A class=mw-redirect title=PPPoA href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/PPPoA&quot;&gt;PPPoA&lt;/A&gt;) encapsulated sessions. By acting as the PPP termination point, the BRAS is responsible for assigning session parameters such as IP addresses to the clients. The BRAS is also the first IP hop from the client to the Internet.&lt;/P&gt;
&lt;P&gt;The BRAS is also the interface to authentication, authorization and accounting systems (see &lt;A title=RADIUS href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/RADIUS&quot;&gt;RADIUS&lt;/A&gt;)&lt;/P&gt;</description>
    
    <category domain="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog">Main Page</category>
    
    <category domain="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/GeneralNetworking">General Networking</category>
    
    
    <ent:cloud ent:href="">
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="Broadband" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=Broadband">Broadband</ent:topic>
    
    </ent:cloud>
    
    
    
  </item>
  
  <item>
    <dc:creator>sparky</dc:creator>
    <title>Cisco Express Forwarding</title>
    <link>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/1/8/4049906.html</link>
    <guid>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2009/1/8/4049906.html</guid>
    <pubDate>Thu, 08 Jan 2009 11:47:00 +0000</pubDate>
    <description>&lt;P&gt;&lt;STRONG&gt;&lt;U&gt;Cisco Express Forwarding - (CEF)&lt;/U&gt;&lt;/STRONG&gt;&lt;/P&gt;
&lt;P&gt;CEF is mainly used to increase &lt;A title=&quot;Packet switching&quot; href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Packet_switching&quot;&gt;packet switching&lt;/A&gt; speed, reducing the overhead and delays introduced by other routing techniques, increasing overall performance. CEF consists of two key components: The &lt;A class=mw-redirect title=&quot;Forwarding Information Base&quot; href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Forwarding_Information_Base&quot;&gt;Forwarding Information Base (FIB)&lt;/A&gt; and &lt;strong&gt;adjacencies&lt;/strong&gt;.&lt;/P&gt;
&lt;P&gt;The &lt;strong&gt;FIB&lt;/strong&gt; is similar to the routing table generated by multiple &lt;A class=mw-redirect title=&quot;Routing protocols&quot; href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Routing_protocols&quot;&gt;routing protocols&lt;/A&gt;, maintaining only the next-hop address for a particular IP-route.&lt;/P&gt;
&lt;P&gt;The &lt;strong&gt;adjacency&lt;/strong&gt; maintains layer 2 or switching information linked to a particular FIB entry, avoiding the need for an &lt;A title=&quot;Address Resolution Protocol&quot; href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Address_Resolution_Protocol&quot;&gt;ARP&lt;/A&gt; request for each table lookup. There are five types of adjacencies:&lt;/P&gt;
&lt;UL&gt;
&lt;LI&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Null adjacency&lt;/strong&gt;: Handles packets destined to a NULL interface. Packets with FIB entries pointing to NULL adjacencies will normally be dropped.&lt;/LI&gt;
&lt;LI&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Punt adjacency&lt;/strong&gt;: Deals with packets that require special handling or can not be switched by CEF. Such packets are forwarded to the next switching layer (generally fast switching) where they can be forwarded correctly.&lt;/LI&gt;
&lt;LI&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Glean adjacency&lt;/strong&gt;: Handles packets destined for currently attached hosts, but without layer 2 information.&lt;/LI&gt;
&lt;LI&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Discard adjacency&lt;/strong&gt;: FIB entries pointing to this type of adjacency will be discarded.&lt;/LI&gt;
&lt;LI&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Drop adjacency&lt;/strong&gt;: Packets pointing to this entry are dropped, but the prefix will be checked.&lt;/LI&gt;&lt;/UL&gt;
&lt;P&gt;In order to take full advantage of CEF, it is recommended to use &lt;strong&gt;distributed CEF&lt;/strong&gt; (dCEF), where there is a FIB table on each of the line cards. This avoids the need for querying the main processor or routing table in order to get the next-hop information, performing the fast switching on the line card itself.&lt;/P&gt;
&lt;P&gt;CEF currently supports &lt;A title=Ethernet href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ethernet&quot;&gt;Ethernet&lt;/A&gt;, &lt;A class=mw-redirect title=&quot;Frame Relay&quot; href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Frame_Relay&quot;&gt;Frame Relay&lt;/A&gt;, &lt;A title=&quot;Asynchronous Transfer Mode&quot; href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Asynchronous_Transfer_Mode&quot;&gt;ATM&lt;/A&gt;, &lt;A title=&quot;Point-to-Point Protocol&quot; href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Point-to-Point_Protocol&quot;&gt;PPP&lt;/A&gt;, &lt;A class=mw-redirect title=FDDI href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/FDDI&quot;&gt;FDDI&lt;/A&gt;, &lt;A title=&quot;IP tunnel&quot; href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/IP_tunnel&quot;&gt;Tunnels&lt;/A&gt; and &lt;A class=mw-redirect title=HDLC href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/HDLC&quot;&gt;HDLC&lt;/A&gt;.&lt;/P&gt;
&lt;P&gt;&lt;U&gt;&lt;STRONG&gt;&lt;FONT size=4&gt;Function&lt;/FONT&gt;&lt;/STRONG&gt;&lt;/U&gt;&lt;/P&gt;
&lt;P&gt;#sh ip cef ?&lt;/P&gt;
&lt;P&gt;#sh ip cef [source ip] [dest ip] - this cmd will display the next hop information required to get from source to destination.&lt;/P&gt;</description>
    
    <category domain="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog">Main Page</category>
    
    <category domain="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/Ciscoterms">Cisco terms</category>
    
    
    <ent:cloud ent:href="">
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="CEF" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=CEF">CEF</ent:topic>
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="Switcing" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=Switcing">Switcing</ent:topic>
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="Routing" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=Routing">Routing</ent:topic>
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="IP" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=IP">IP</ent:topic>
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="EIGRP" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=EIGRP">EIGRP</ent:topic>
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="Cisco" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=Cisco">Cisco</ent:topic>
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="CCNA" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=CCNA">CCNA</ent:topic>
    
    </ent:cloud>
    
    
    
  </item>
  
  <item>
    <dc:creator>sparky</dc:creator>
    <title>Firewall Switch Modules</title>
    <link>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2008/12/11/4016491.html</link>
    <guid>http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/_archives/2008/12/11/4016491.html</guid>
    <pubDate>Thu, 11 Dec 2008 15:25:00 +0000</pubDate>
    <description>&lt;font size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;font-weight: bold; text-decoration: underline; font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;&quot;&gt;Firewall Services Module&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/font&gt;FWSM is a &lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Firewall&quot; title=&quot;Firewall&quot;&gt;firewall&lt;/a&gt; module integrated by &lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cisco&quot; title=&quot;Cisco&quot; class=&quot;mw-redirect&quot;&gt;Cisco&lt;/a&gt;
into his Catalyst 6500 Switches and 7600 Series Routers. Installed
inside a Cisco Catalyst 6500 Series Switch or Cisco 7600 Internet
Router, the FWSM allows any port on the device to operate as a &lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Firewall&quot; title=&quot;Firewall&quot;&gt;firewall&lt;/a&gt; port and integrates &lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Firewall&quot; title=&quot;Firewall&quot;&gt;firewall&lt;/a&gt; security inside the network infrastructure. The FWSM is based on &lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cisco&quot; title=&quot;Cisco&quot; class=&quot;mw-redirect&quot;&gt;Cisco&lt;/a&gt; PIX technology and uses the same time-tested &lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cisco&quot; title=&quot;Cisco&quot; class=&quot;mw-redirect&quot;&gt;Cisco&lt;/a&gt; PIX Operating System, a secure, real-time &lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Operating_system&quot; title=&quot;Operating system&quot;&gt;operating system&lt;/a&gt;. The Cisco FWSM enables organizations to manage multiple firewalls from the same management platform. Features: &lt;b&gt;Resource manager&lt;/b&gt;
helps organizations limit the resources allocated to any security
context at any time thus ensuring that one security context does not
interfere with another. &lt;b&gt;The transparent firewall&lt;/b&gt; feature configures the FWSM to act as a &lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Layer_2&quot; title=&quot;Layer 2&quot; class=&quot;mw-redirect&quot;&gt;Layer 2&lt;/a&gt; bridging &lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Firewall&quot; title=&quot;Firewall&quot;&gt;firewall&lt;/a&gt; resulting in minimal changes to &lt;a href=&quot;http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Network_topology&quot; title=&quot;Network topology&quot;&gt;network topology&lt;/a&gt;.</description>
    
    <category domain="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog">Main Page</category>
    
    <category domain="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/CiscoSecurity">Cisco Security</category>
    
    
    <ent:cloud ent:href="">
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="Firewall" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=Firewall">Firewall</ent:topic>
    
    <ent:topic ent:id="Cisco" ent:href="http://www.jdspark.co.uk/blog/cmd=search_keyword/k=Cisco">Cisco</ent:topic>
    
    </ent:cloud>
    
    
    
  </item>
  
</channel>
</rss>
